I Harrison Final Thesis

University of Huddersfield Repository
Harrison, Iain
An exploration into the uses of extended techniques in works for the saxophone, and how their
application may be informed by a contextual understanding of the works themselves
Original Citation
Harrison, Iain (2012) An exploration into the uses of extended techniques in works for the
saxophone, and how their application may be informed by a contextual understanding of the works
themselves. Doctoral thesis, University of Huddersfield.
This version is available at http://eprints.hud.ac.uk/18047/
The University Repository is a digital collection of the research output of the
University, available on Open Access. Copyright and Moral Rights for the items
on this site are retained by the individual author and/or other copyright owners.
Users may access full items free of charge; copies of full text items generally
can be reproduced, displayed or performed and given to third parties in any
format or medium for personal research or study, educational or notforprofit
purposes without prior permission or charge, provided:
• The authors, title and full bibliographic details is credited in any copy;
• A hyperlink and/or URL is included for the original metadata page; and
• The content is not changed in any way.
For more information, including our policy and submission procedure, please
contact the Repository Team at: E.mailbox@hud.ac.uk.
http://eprints.hud.ac.uk/
AN EXPLORATION INTO THE USES OF
EXTENDED TECHNIQUES IN WORKS FOR THE
SAXOPHONE, AND HOW THEIR APPLICATION
MAY BE INFORMED BY A CONTEXTUAL
UNDERSTANDING OF THE WORKS THEMSELVES
IAIN HARRISON
A thesis submitted to the University of Huddersfield in partial fulfilment of the requirements

for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy
The University of Huddersfield
October 2012
Copyright statement
ι The author of this thesis (including any appendices and/or schedules to this
thesis) owns any copyright in it (the “Copyright”) and s/he has given The
University of Huddersfield the right to use such copyright for any administrative,
promotional, educational and/or teaching purposes.
ιι Copies of this thesis, either in full or in extracts, may be made only in accordance
with the regulations of the University Library. Details of these regulations may be
obtained from the Librarian. This page must form part of any such copies made.
ιιι The ownership of any patents, designs, trademarks and any and all other
intellectual property rights except for the Copyright (the “Intellectual Property
Rights”) and any reproductions of copyright works, for example graphs and
tables (“Reproductions”), which may be described in this thesis, may not be
owned by the author and may be owned by third parties. Such Intellectual
Property Rights and Reproductions cannot and must not be made available for
use without the prior written permission of the owner(s) of the relevant
Intellectual Property Rights and/or Reproductions
1
Abstract
This thesis investigates how the specific manipulation of a range of extended techniques for
the saxophone can help the performer to highlight key aspects of the music. These
techniques can be performed with varying levels of nuance through which the implicit
thematic relationships within a composition can be emphasised. The performer's
interpretation is therefore aided by the controlled manipulation of extended techniques, with
the intention of using these techniques to serve the overall analysis of the composition.
A brief summary of the acoustical phenomena which produces the saxophone's range of
extended techniques is included, leading to discussion of the necessary physical
manipulations of the oral cavity, alterations of fingerings systems, and other such
physiological issues.
The differences from performer to performer of the resulting sounds of the saxophone's
extended techniques are considered through reference to recorded material. A discussion is
presented regarding individual performers' attitudes to these techniques including the
preparation of extended techniques, the importance of equipment, and the performer's
opinion of the composer's utilisation of extended techniques within a composition.
The final section outlines the preparation of seven compositions which use extended
techniques: four of which are taken from the saxophone's standard repertoire and three of
which were written in collaboration with the author. It is not the author's intention to
present a global methodology by which extended techniques can be sounded in
performance; rather it is the author's intention to highlight how the manipulation of these
techniques, through an understanding of the acoustical and physiological nature of their
production, can be performed with a nuanced production technique that can enhance the
interpretation of the work as a whole.
2
Table of Contents
Abstract....................................................................................................................2
List of Tables .............................................................................................................7
List of Figures ...........................................................................................................9
Dedications and Acknowledgements ...........................................................................20
Introduction.............................................................................................................21
Interpretation......................................................................................................21
Edison Denisov Sonata for Alto Saxophone and Piano (1973): An Early Use of
Multiphonics.........................................................................................................25
Chapter 1................................................................................................................30
An Investigation Into Materials Relating to the Usage of Extended Techniques Within
Compositions with an Emphasis on Pedagogy, Repertoire and Research...........................30
Extended Woodwind Technique...............................................................................30
Pitch Techniques...............................................................................................34
Altissimo......................................................................................................34
Harmonics (Aeolian Sounds)..........................................................................36
Microtones...................................................................................................39
Multiphonic Techniques......................................................................................41
Singing and Playing.......................................................................................41
Multiphonics.................................................................................................43
Timbre Techniques............................................................................................51
Timbral Fingerings and Bisbigliando................................................................51
Embouchure Techniques................................................................................52
Key Percussion.............................................................................................54
Flutter Tongue..............................................................................................56
Duration Techniques..........................................................................................58
Slap Tongue (Short)......................................................................................58
Circular Breathing (Long)...............................................................................59
Chapter 2 ...............................................................................................................61
The Acoustical Behaviour of Woodwind Instruments: An Overview..................................61
Part I: Acoustical Properties Common to All Woodwind Instruments............................62
Tubes..............................................................................................................62
Sound Waves From Pipes...................................................................................63
Standing Waves in Pipes....................................................................................67
Bore Shape......................................................................................................69
Impedance (z)..................................................................................................72
3
Part II: The Science of Extended Techniques............................................................75
The Mouthpiece and Embouchure .....................................................................75
Multiphonics.....................................................................................................81
Heterodyne Components ..................................................................................81
Microtones.......................................................................................................86
Fork Fingerings.................................................................................................86
Part III: Understanding the Importance of Physiology...............................................92
Vocal Tract Influence.........................................................................................93
The Effect of the Larynx...................................................................................100
The Importance of Tongue Position....................................................................106
Chapter 3 .............................................................................................................114
The Preparation and Performance of Extended Techniques Within Notated Music.............114
An Exploration Into the Variation of Sounds in the Performance of Extended Techniques.
........................................................................................................................114
Performers' Perspectives of Interpreting Extended Techniques..................................121
The Relationship Between Equipment Choice and the Resultant Sound...................121
The Balance Between Established and Extended Saxophone Technique..................123
Performers' Perspective on Composers' Use of Extended Techniques......................125
The Need for Collaboration...............................................................................127
The Composer's Perception About the Interpretation of Extended Techniques Within Their
Own Compositions..............................................................................................129
Chapter 4..............................................................................................................132
Preparing Extended Techniques for the Saxophone: 7 Case Studies...............................132
Section 1...........................................................................................................133
Fuminori Tanada Mysterious Morning III (1996) For Soprano Saxophone....................133
Altissimo........................................................................................................134
Harmonics......................................................................................................135
Microtones.....................................................................................................137
Singing and Playing.........................................................................................144
Multiphonics...................................................................................................148
Slap Tongue...................................................................................................153
Section 2...........................................................................................................154
Nicolaus A. Huber Aus Schmerz und Trauer (1982) For Alto Saxophone.....................154
Altissimo........................................................................................................155
Harmonics......................................................................................................157
Multiphonics...................................................................................................158
Timbral Fingerings..........................................................................................161
4
Embouchure Techniques..................................................................................163
Circular Breathing...........................................................................................166
Section 3...........................................................................................................166
Betsy Jolas Épisode Quatrième (1983) For Tenor Saxophone....................................166
Pitch Techniques – Harmonics...........................................................................167
Microtones.....................................................................................................169
Multiphonics...................................................................................................171
Timbral Techniques – Trills...............................................................................174
Embouchure Effects........................................................................................178
Duration Techniques – Slap Tongue With Key Percussion......................................179
Section 4...........................................................................................................182
Ichirô Nodaïra Arabesque III (1983) For Alto Saxophone and Piano...........................182
Altissimo........................................................................................................183
Multiphonics...................................................................................................185
Bisbigliando....................................................................................................191
Key Percussion ..............................................................................................196
Flutter Tongue................................................................................................197
Slap Tongue...................................................................................................199
Section 5...........................................................................................................202
Scott Mc Laughlin Neither Wholes nor Parts (2010) For Alto Saxophone.....................202
Multiphonics...................................................................................................204
Pitch Techniques.............................................................................................208
Slap Tongue...................................................................................................210
Section 6...........................................................................................................212
Ben Isaacs I Never Look Like Myself (2009) For Soprano Saxophone.........................212
Microtones.....................................................................................................213
Section 7...........................................................................................................218
Ray Evanoff Diagramming a Vivisection of Yours and Mine (Ineffectual Tracings of
Antiquated Sounds): A Floregium (2010)...............................................................218
Microtones.....................................................................................................219
Multiphonics...................................................................................................223
Slap Tongue...................................................................................................225
5
Conclusion.............................................................................................................227
Implications for Performance................................................................................227
New Compositions for the Saxophone....................................................................228
Implications for Saxophone Pedagogy ...................................................................229
Developing a New Instrumental Technique – Understanding Internal Elements ..........231
Appendices............................................................................................................233
Appendix 1.........................................................................................................233
Appendix 2.........................................................................................................239
Bibliography...........................................................................................................240
Books and Theses...............................................................................................240
Repertoire..........................................................................................................242
Discography.......................................................................................................243
Word count: 56,629
6
List of Tables
Table 1: Classifications of extended techniques as taken from Weiss & Netti (2010)
Table 2: Classifications of extended techniques as taken from Londeix (1989)
Table 3: Classifications of extended techniques as compiled as a combination of Weiss &
Netti (2010) and Londeix's (1989) suggestions
Table 4: Basic classifications of multiphonics as taken from Weiss & Netti (2010)
Table 5: Further classifications of extended techniques as taken from Weiss & Netti (2010)
Table 6: Benade's table of simple Heterodyne relationships
Table 7: Banade's table of Heterodyne relationships with values taken from Kientzy
multiphonic number 90. All figures are in Hz
Table 8: Banade's table of Heterodyne relationships with values taken from Kientzy
multiphonic number 90. All figures are in Hz
Table 9:Diagram of the harmonic series played on the soprano saxophone and the
corresponding tongue positions
Table 10: Classifications of extended techniques as compiled as a combination of Weiss &
Netti (2010) and Londeix's (1989) suggestions
Table 11: Suggested fingerings for alternative fingerings as taken from Weiss & Netti's and
Londeix's fingering systems
Table 12: Suggested fingerings for alternative fingerings as taken from a mixture of Weiss &
Netti, Tanada, and Londeix's fingering systems
Table 13: Suggested fingerings for the notes G4 quarter tone sharp and D4 three quarter
tones sharp from Weiss & Netti's and Londeix's fingering systems
Table 14: Resultant frequencies from Weiss & Netti, Tanada, and Londeix's fingering systems
Table 15: Resulting intervals for mixed fingering combinations taken from Weiss & Netti,
Tanada, and Londeix's suggesations
Netti, Tanada, and Londeix's fingering systems
Table 19: Heterodyne component table with values taken from Tanada Mysterious Morning
III (1996) page 3 line 1
Table 20: Heterodyne component table with values taken from Tanada Mysterious Morning
Table 21: Resulting frequencies from heterodyne components sounded during Fuminori
Tanada Mysterious Morning III (1996) page 8 line 2
Table 22: Resultant alternate fingerings frequencies from Weiss & Netti (2010)
Table 23: Resultant alternate fingerings frequencies from Londeix (1989)
7
Netti's and Londeix's fingering systems
Table 25: Resultant frequencies from playing alternate fingerings for the note E5
Table 26: Resultant frequencies from playing alternate fingerings for the note D5
Table 27: List of microtones that are used in Ben Isaacs I never look like myself (2009)
Table 28: Fingering suggestions from Weiss & Netti (2010) and Londeix (1989)
Table 29: Fingering choices for from Weiss & Netti (2010) and Londeix (1989) for use in
Ben Isaacs I never look like myself (2009)
Table 30: List of multiphonics used in Ray Evanoff Diagramming a Vivisection of Yours and
Mine (Ineffectual Tracings of Antiquated Sounds): A Floregium (2010)
8
List of Figures
Introduction
Fig.1 Kientzy multiphonic number 1 for alto as taken from Les Sons Multiples Aux
Saxophones (2003)
Fig.2 Edison Denisov Sonata for Alto Saxophone and Piano (1973) mvmt 2 line 1
Fig.3 Kientzy multiphonic number 115 for alto as taken from Les Sons Multiples Aux
Saxophones (2003)
Fig.4 Edison Denisov Sonata for Alto Saxophone and Piano (1973) mvmt 1 bb.116-117
Chapter 1
Fig.1.1 Jaques Ibert Concertino da Camera Movement II bb.24-30
Fig.1.2 Alexander Glavunov Concerto for alto saxophone figure 55 bb.4-7
Fig.1.3 Technique of overblowing sixths taken from Eugene Rousseau's Saxophone High
Tones (1978)
Fig.1.4 Takashi Yoshimatsu Fuzzy Bird Sonata (1995) p.1 line 4
Fig.1.5 Nicolaus A. Huber Aus Schmerz und Trauer (1982) p.11 b.5
Fig.1.6 Fuminori Tanada Mysterious Morning III (1996) p.7 line 7
Fig.1.7 Mike Vaughan Ensphered (1990) bb.9-10
Fig.1.8 Demonstration of playing on different partials (represented numerically) from Sigurd

Rascher's Top Tones for the Saxophone (1941)
Fig.1.9 Yoshihisa Taïra Pénombres VI (1996) p.1 line 1
Fig.1.10 Edison Denisov Sonata for Alto Saxophone and Piano movement II line 4
Fig.1.11 Ryo Noda Maï (1975) p.1 line 1 and p.4 line 2
Fig.1.12 Ichiro Nodaira Arabesque III (1983) b.130
Fig.1.16 Betsy Jolas Épisode Quatrième (1983) p.4 line 5
9
Fig.1.18 Jindrich Feld Sonata for Alto Saxophone and Piano (1990)
Fig.1.19 Ryo Noda Maï (1975) p.4 lines 3-5
Fig.1.20 Fuminori Tanada Mysterious morning III (1996) p.6 lines 3 and 4
Fig.1.21 Fuminori Tanada Mysterious morning III (1996) p.6 line 5
Fig.1.22 Luciano Berio Sequenza VIIb (2003) line 13
Fig.1.23 Christian Lauba Savane (1996) p.7 line 2
Fig.1.24 Suggested multiphonics to fit over C major and C minor chords taken from Phelps'
A Thesaurus of Saxophone Multiphonics and a Guide to their Practical Application (1998)
Fig.1.25 Suggested multiphonics to fit over E half-diminished and E diminished chords taken
from Phelps' A Thesaurus of Saxophone Multiphonics and a Guide to their Practical
Application (1998)
Fig.1.26 Luciano Berio Sequenza IXb (1980) p.5 line 7
Fig.1.28 Mark-Anthony Turnage Two Elegies Framing a Shout (1997) movement 1 b.29
Fig.1.30 Pedro Itturalde Pequena Czarda (1997)
Fig.1.31 Jindrich Feld Sonata for Alto Saxophone and Piano (1989-1990)
Fig.1.32 Michael Clark Enmeshed (2005)
Fig.1.33 Edison Denisov Sonata for Alto Saxophone and Piano (1973) movement III bb.69-
70
Fig.1.34Fuminori Tanada Mysterious morning III (1996) p.3 line 1
Fig.1.35(a) Aaron Cassidy Asphyxia (2000) b.26
Fig.1.35(b)Aaron Cassidy Asphyxia (2000) bb.30-31
Fig.1.36 Christian Lauba Jungle (1996) p.14 line 8
Fig.1.37 Betsy Jolas Épisode Quatrième (1983) b.1
Fig.1.38 William Walton Old Sir Faulk from Façade (1936) bb.14-15
Fig.1.39 Christian Lauba Balafon (1996) p.1 line 8
Chapter 2
Fig.2.1 Diagram of wavelength behaviour in both an Open pipe (left,)representing the flute)
and a closed pipe (right, representing the clarinet) whilst performing the harmonic series
10
Fig.2.2 The natural harmonic series taken from Wolfe, J. (n.d.). Open vs closed pipes
(Flutes vs clarinets). Available at: www.phys.unsw.edu.au/jw/flutes.v.clrinets.html.
Fig.2.3 Oscilloscope reading of the author playing the fundamental (C4) and first three
partials (C5, G5, C6) on the flute, with the corresponding ratios where λ = wavelength
Fig.2.4 Ratios of a vibrating string where L = Length (of resonator), f = frequency and v =
constant velocity.
Fig.2.5 Wavelengths within a cylinder closed at one end
Fig.2.6 Oscilloscope reading of the author playing the fundamental (D3) and first two
partials (A4, F5) on the clarinet, with the corresponding ratios where λ = wavelength
Fig.2.7 Diagram of different conic sections available at

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/File:Conic_sections_with_plane.svg accessed on 1st February
2011
Fig.2.8 Oscilloscope reading of the author playing the fundamental (A3) and first three
partials (A4, E5, A6) on the soprano saxophone, with the corresponding ratios where λ =
wavelength
Fig.2.9 Acoustic impedance of a theoretical cylinder which is effectively infinite in length and
has no external factors acting upon it
Fig.2.10 Acoustic impedance as measured in a cylinder plus cone, a soprano saxophone, a

clarinet, a flute, and a theoretically infinite cylinder
Fig.2.11 A spectral analysis of A4 played on the alto using a Vandoren Optimum AL3
mouthpiece (left) and a Freddie Gregory Model F6 (right).
Fig.2.12 A spectral analysis of A4 played on the tenor using a Selmer S80 D mouthpiece
(left) and a Berg Larson grained ebonite 110 mouthpiece (right).
Fig.2.13 Diagram representing the flow of pressure across a reed.
Fig.2.14 Graph representing the relationship between air flow and mouth pressure
Fig.2.15 Graphs representing the relationship between air flow and mouth pressure at
differing dynamic levels
Fig.2.16 Heterodyne components in clarinet multiphonics taken from Backus (1978)

Fig.2.17 SPEAR analysis of Kientzy multiphonic number 90 played on the soprano
saxophone
Fig.2.18 SPEAR analysis of Kientzy multiphonic number 48 played on the soprano

saxophone
11
Fig.2.19 Diagram showing Benade's 'open-hole lattice'
Fig.2.20 Fingering chart showing a two-finger fork on the recorder taken from
http://www.wfg.woodwind.org/recorder/rec_bas_1.html
Fig.2.21 Quarter-tone fingering chart, taken from Delangle and Michat (1998)
Fig.2.22(a) G# bridge mechanism, G# key not depressed, right hand not depressed,
Fig.2.22(b) G# bridge mechanism, G# key depressed, right hand not depressed
Fig.2.22(c) G# bridge mechanism, G# key depressed, right hand depressed
Fig.2.22(d) altered G# bridge mechanism, G# key depressed, right hand depressed
Fig.2.23 Fingering chart taken from Caravan (1974)
Fig.2.24 Fingering chart taken from http://www.wfg.woodwind.org
Fig.2.25(a) Indication and symbol for the release of lip pressure to play G quarter tone
sharp
Fig.2.26(b) Denisov's Sonata for Alto Saxophone and Piano, movement II, line 4
Fig.2.27 Graph indicating the relationship between vocal tract resonance with resulting
impedance and frequency played
Fig.2.28 The four multiphonics used in Scavone et al's experiment to measure sound
pressure levels
Fig.2.29 Graphs indicating the sound pressure levels measured for each multiphonic by
subject B (top) and subject D (bottom)
Fig.2.30 SPEAR analysis of the author playing the multiphonics in Scavone et al's
experiment on the Vandoren Optimum AL3 mouthpiece
Fig.2.31 SPEAR analysis of the author playing the multiphonics in Scavone et al's
experiment on the Freddie Gregory Model F6 mouthpiece
Fig.2.32 Graph indicating a proportional link between higher frequencies and higher sound
pressure levels (SPL)
Fig.2.33 Diagram of the larynx taken from Husler & Rodd-Marling (1976)
Fig.2.34 Diagram showing 'a mechanical analog of the larynx' taken from Benade (1976)
Fig.2.35 Endoscope of a bassoonist producing vibrato
Fig.2.36 Endoscope plus illustration of a saxophone player's larynx during inspiration
Fig.2.37 Endoscope plus illustrations of a saxophone player's larynx whilst playing forte high
(top), forte glissando to piano (middle) and forte low (bottom)
12
Fig.2.38 Table taken from W.E. Carr (1974) outlining tongue proximity in mm to the roof of
the mouth when playing in different registers of the woodwinds
Fig.2.39 Diagram of tongue positions when pronouncing different vowel shapes
Chapter 3
Fig.3.1 Yoshimatsu Fuzzy Bird Sonata (1991) Mvmt 1 figure B
Fig.3.2 Yoshimatsu Fuzzy Bird Sonata (1991) Mvmt 1 figure J
Fig.3.3 Luciano Berio Sequenza IXb (1980) figure J
Fig.3.4 Kientzy multiphonic numbers 36 and 13 as taken from Les Sons Multiples Aux
Saxophones (2003)
Fig.3.5 Kientzy multiphonic number 20 as taken from Les Sons Multiples Aux Saxophones
(2003)
Fig.3.7 Betsy Jolas Épisode Quatrième (1983) page 4 line 5
Chapter 4
Section 1
Fuminori Tanada Mysterious Morning III (1996)
Fig.4.1.1 Fuminori Tanada Mysterious Morning III (1996) page 6 lines 6 and 7
Fig.4.1.2 Fuminori Tanada Mysterious Morning III (1996) page 7 line 7
Fig.4.1.5 Weiss & Netti's fingering for F4 quartertone sharp and Kientzy fingering for
multiphonic number 46
Fig.4.1.7 Fuminori Tanada Mysterious Morning III (1996) page 7 lines 2-4
Fig.4.1.11 Musical representation of the resultant sounds from the heterodyne relationships
between the saxophone's concert E5 and the voice's concert E5 sung sharp
13
between the saxophone's concert E5 and the voice's concert E5 sung flat
between the saxophone's concert Ab3 and the voice's concert Ab3 sung sharp (left) and flat
(right)
Fig.4.1.15 Fuminori Tanada Mysterious Morning III (1996) page 6 lines 3 & 4
Fig.4.1.16 Kientzy multiphonic number 20 taken from Les Sons Multiples Aux Saxophones
(2003)
Fig.4.1.17 Weiss & Netti (2010) multiphonic number 8 and the same fingering as shown in
Londeix (1989)
Fig.4.1.18 Kientzy multiphonic numbers 1 and 85 taken from Les Sons Multiples Aux
Saxophones (2003)
Section 2
Nicolaus A. Huber Aus Schmerz und Trauer (1982)
Fig.4.2.1 Nicolaus A. Huber Aus Schmerz und Trauer (1982) page 7 line 1
Fig.4.2.2 Nicolaus A. Huber Aus Schmerz und Trauer (1982) page 10 lines 1-2
Fig.4.2.4 Triad multiphonics in order of appearance in Aus Schmerz und Trauer (1982)
Fig.4.2.5 Nicolaus A. Huber Aus Schmerz und Trauer page 6 lines 2 and 3
Fig.4.2.6 Nicolaus A. Huber Aus Schmerz und Trauer page 11 line 1
Fig.4.2.8 Alternate fingering chart for C5 taken from Weiss & Netti (2010)
Fig.4.2.10 SPEAR analysis of two different mouthpieces performing the C# timbre gliss, the
left is a Vandoren AL3 and the right is a Freddie Gregory F6.
14
Fig.4.2.11 Nicolaus A. Huber Aus Schmerz und Trauer (1982) page 9 lines 3 and 4
Fig.4.2.12 Nicolaus A. Huber Aus Schmerz und Trauer (1982) page 9 lines 6 and 7
Section 3
Betsy Jolas Épisode Quatrième (1983)
Fig.4.3.1 Betsy Jolas Épisode Quatrième (1983) page 3 line 6
Fig.4.3.5 Fingering suggestions for the note E4 quartertone sharp as taken from Weiss &
Netti (2010) and Londeix (1989)
Fig.4.3.6 Fingering suggestions for the note F4 quartertone sharp as taken from Weiss &
Netti (2010) and Londeix (1989)
Fig.4.3.7 Kientzy multiphonic number 77 as taken from Les Sons Multiples Aux Saxophones
(2003)
Fig.4.3.8 Kientzy multiphonic numbers 37 and 38 as taken from Les Sons Multiples Aux
Saxophones (2003)
Fig.4.3.10 Kientzy multiphonic numbers 67 as taken from Les Sons Multiples Aux
Saxophones (2003)
Fig.4.3.11 Kientzy multiphonic number 5 as taken from Les Sons Multiples Aux Saxophones
(2003)
Fig.4.3.12 Kientzy multiphonic number 44 as taken from Les Sons Multiples Aux
Saxophones (2003)
Fig.4.3.14 Fingering suggestions for the note B4 quartertone flat as taken from Londeix
(1989)
Fig.4.3.15 Fingering suggestions for the note B4 quartertone flat as taken from Weiss &
Netti (2010)
15
Fig.4.3.18 Kientzy multiphonic number 118 as taken from Les Sons Multiples Aux
Saxophones (2003)
Section 4
Ichirô Nodaïra Arabesque III (1983)
Fig.4.4.1 Ichirô Nodaïra Arabesque III (1983) bb.13-16
Fig.4.4.2 Nodaïra's microtonal fingerings for the altissimo register
Fig.4.4.3 Ichirô Nodaïra Arabesque III (1983) b.115
Fig.4.4.4 Ichirô Nodaïra Arabesque III (1983) bb.1-3 (piano score)
Fig.4.4.5 Ichirô Nodaïra Arabesque III (1983) bb.1-3 (saxophone part)
Fig.4.4.6 Ichirô Nodaïra Arabesque III (1983) bb.72 – 75
(2003)
Fig.4.4.8 Weiss & Netti multiphonic number 2 taken from The techniques of saxophone
playing (2010)
Fig.4.4.13 Alternate fingerings for E5 taken from Weiss & Netti (2010)
Fig.4.4.14 Alternate fingerings for E5 taken from Londeix (1989)
Fig.4.4.15 alternate fingerings for the note D5 as taken from Weiss & Netti (2010) and
Londeix (1989)

16
Fig.4.4.21 Ichirô Nodaïra Arabesque III (1983) piano score b.82
Fig.4.4.22 Ichirô Nodaïra Arabesque III (1983) piano score bb. 71-75
Section 5
Scott Mc Laughlin Neither Wholes nor Parts (2010)
Fig.4.5.1 Scott Mc Laughlin Neither Wholes nor Parts (2010) page 1 line 1
(2003)
(2003)
(2003)
(2003)
(2003)
17
Section 6
Ben Iasaacs I Never Look Like Myself (2009)
Fig.4.6.1 Ben Isaacs I Never Look Like Myself (2009) movement I bb.2-3
Fig.4.6.2 Fingering suggestions for microtones between the notes A5 and D5 quartertone
sharp taken from Weiss & Netti (2010)
Fig.4.6.3 Fingering suggestions for microtones between the notes A5 and D5 quartertone
sharp taken from Londeix (1989)
Section 7
Ray Evanoff Diagramming a Vivisection of Yours and Mine (Ineffectual Tracings of

Antiquated Sounds): A Floregium (2010)
Fig.4.7.1 Ray Evanoff Diagramming a Vivisection of Yours and Mine (Ineffectual Tracings of
Antiquated Sounds): A Floregium (2010) mvmt 1 page 1 line 4
Fig.4.7.3 Fingering suggestion for the note A5 quartertone flat as taken from Weiss & Netti
(2010, left) and Londeix (1989, right)
Fig.4.7.4 Examples of consecutive microtones with tempered notes taken from Ray
Evanoff's Diagramming a Vivisection of Yours and Mine (Ineffectual Tracings of Antiquated
Sounds): A Floregium (2010)
Fig.4.7.5 Fingering suggestion for the notes C5 quartertone sharp,F5 quartertone sharp and
B5 quartertone flat as taken from Weiss & Netti (2010, top) and Londeix (1989, bottom) n.b
Londeix's fingering for B5 quartertone flat uses the 'Ta' trill key to produce the fork instead
of the third finger; the result is, however, the same.
18
19
Dedications and Acknowledgements
The author would like to thank those people whose work, professionalism, talent, and
patience, have made the completion of this thesis possible. Thanks goes to those
saxophonists who gave up their time to discuss their experiences of extended techniques:
Rob Buckland, John Butcher, Claude Delangle, Frank Gratkowski, Simon Haram, John Harle,
Evan Parker, Franziska Schroeder, and Andy Scott.
Thanks also goes to the composers whose skill and willingness to collaborate produced
material for the case studies section of this thesis: Ray Evanoff, Ben Isaacs, and Scott Mc
Laughlin.
The author would like to thank his supervisor Dr Philip Thomas, and his director of studies
Prof. Matthew Adkins; their knowledge and enthusiasm have kept the project travelling in
the right direction.
Special thanks go to my friends Drs Richard Glover and Scott Mc Laughlin, who have
provided advice, encouragement, and the odd favour. I would especially like to thank my
family who have never stopped believing in me and finally my wife Kate, without whose
encouragement and support this thesis would not exist: this thesis is therefore dedicated to
her.
20
Introduction
Interpretation
Edward T. Cone writes about the audience's perception of art which occupies a single
temporal space, as opposed to those art forms which can be re-experienced such as
painting, sculpture, or the written word. The performance arts which are experienced in a
single moment in time can only present one interpretation at a time, and therefore are 'not
an approximation of some ideal' (Cone, 1968, p.34). This presents an interpreter with a
question 'which of the relationships implicit in this piece are to be emphasized, to be made
explicit?' (Cone, 1968, p.34). The same question can be posed of compositions which
include an array of extended techniques as a performer relies upon the composer's notation
of extended techniques in order to produce a sound that is appropriate for that point in the
composition. The emphasis of certain musical aspects (pitch, rhythm, timbre) within the
production of an extended technique is based upon the performer's understanding of the
role of that technique within the composition as a whole. The relationship between
performance and analysis is highlighted by authors such as John Rink, Edward T. Cone and
Joel Lester; and a definition between 'academic analysis' and 'performance analysis' is
generally agreed upon. John Rink writes that 'it must be stressed that “performer's analysis”
primarily as an interpretation is being formulated and subsequently re-evaluated' (John
Rink, 2002, p.39). This confirms Cone's statement that choices are made about the
composition during the process of rehearsal, which then inform an interpretation. This
presents the listener with an interpretation whose 'findings are assimilated into the
generalised body of knowledge that lies behind but does not dominate any given
performance act' (John Rink, 2002, pp.39-40), again promoting the choices the performer
makes when preparing a performance. Joel Lester refers to the score as a 'map' or 'recipe'
for something which exists 'beyond its score' (Lester, 1995, p.199), and this is particularly
relevant when discussing extended techniques where a complex sound, with multiple
opportunity for nuance, is communicated to the performer through the visual medium of
notation. Lester goes on to state the following:
21
'each nuance limits the piece by excluding other options for that element. In
this sense, a performance is necessarily only a single option for that piece,
delineating some aspects while excluding others'
(Lester, 1995, p.199)
The performer makes their choices based upon the context of the work as a whole to decide
which relationships need to be expressed, and therefore how extended techniques are to be
sounded using a nuanced performance technique to achieve their interpretational goals.
Christian Lauba, in his piece Neuf Etudes (1996), manages to successfully integrate
multiphonic intervals into the musical language of the composition, resulting in a work
which uses voice leading in both the top and middle parts of the multiphonics to create the
illusion of a melodic line; especially in the movement entitled Savane. In the performance
directions for the composition, the composer states that 'The fingerings of the multiphonic
sounds are only recommendations... The player must respect the written intervals and find
fingerings which are the best adapted to his instrument' (Lauba, 1996). This statement is
problematic, because if a performer's instrument will not produce the correct intervals in a
multiphonic, changing the fingering cannot hope to fix this problem as other multiphonics
will be sounded that may fix one interval whilst altering another. The approach Lauba takes
to his composition is therefore problematic, because stipulating specific fingering choices in
relation to multiphonic interval production can result in different intervals sounding. This is
due to the saxophonist's own physiology, understanding of tongue positions, and equipment
choice which are all variables in the resulting sound that will be produced when performing
extended techniques. It is generally acknowledged that this level of unreliability is
characteristic of multiphonics, and in contrast to Lauba's statement Chris Redgate's article
entitled Performing Sequenza VII (2007) quotes Paul Roberts explaining Berio's
understanding of this fact:
Luciano Berio was a practical musician and realised that this notation of the
multiphonics could not be 100% precise. In a performance of Sequenza VII
the player (oboist, or saxophonist) must produce a convincing effect with the
multiphonics. The quarter-tone indications should be understood as margins
of error, since it is taken for granted that a perfect intonation is almost
impossible.
(Roberts in Redgate, 2007)
22
Other variables which affect the sound of extended techniques include instrument bore
shape, mouthpiece choice and reed strength. Mouthpiece choice can alter the sound and
timbre of certain techniques as 'closed' tipped mouthpieces (typically used for playing the
classical repertoire) allow less reed vibration than 'open' tipped mouthpieces which allow
more partials to sound in the overall timbre and are therefore often used for jazz playing
where a brighter tone is often preferred. When performing techniques which involve the
harmonic series such as spectral sweeps, harmonics and multiphonics, the saxophonist's
knowledge of specific tongue positions and vocal tract tuning is essential not only to
produce an accurate and nuanced sound but often to achieve the technique at all. Likewise
an understanding of the mechanical workings of the saxophone in relation to forked
fingerings and saxophone specific mechanisms (like the articulated G# mechanism) is
advantageous in devising alternative fingerings for microtones. This allows the performer
the opportunity to choose from a number of fingerings depending on the microtonal sound
that is required. These issues are all resolved through the analysis of the surrounding
compositional material, and by considering the choices of fingerings or sound production
methods available based upon the physical manipulation needed to produce the desired
sound.
There are problems with compositions for the saxophone which draw upon extended
techniques as the pedagogy for this style of music is not as developed as it is with other
woodwind instruments. Claude Delangle and Jean Michat state that 'coming from a state of
“no fixed repertory”, the saxophonist can often end up trying everything, as much a
polymath as his instrument is a polymorph' (Delangle & Michat, 1998 p.161). Delangle and
Michat observe that the saxophonist must 'sympathise with the dilemma of the
contemporary composer – how to build on quasi-virgin territory?' (Delangle & Michat, 1998
p.162). Methods of notation for extended techniques such as key clicks, multiphonics,
quartertones, spectral sweeps, singing whilst playing, harmonics and slap tongue can be
problematic as they introduce a level of ambiguity surrounding the appropriate sound that is
23
to be made. It would be a mistake for a performer to rely solely on established fingering
diagrams without considering the sound that will result from this method of production, as
these fingerings could produce a number of different outcomes depending on the variables
of instrument choice, mouthpiece setup and individual physiology, as mentioned previously.
The very fact that there are so many possibilities to manipulate a single multiphonic
fingering and split it into its subsequent partials, as demonstrated in Kientzy's Les Sons
Multiples Aux Saxophones (2003, figure 1 column 7), indicates the transient nature of the
technique, and the level of nuance needed in the production of the sound required (track 1
of the accompanying CD). The interpretative responsibility of the performer is therefore
Fig.1 Kientzy multiphonic number 1 for alto as taken from Les Sons Multiples Aux Saxophones (2003)
paramount as each partial of a multiphonic with a strong oscillation, for example, can be
emphasised or even sounded individually depending on the performer's tongue position.
Column 7 of figure 1 depicts the sounds that can be produced from a single fingering using
the tongue to suppress certain partials and to move between them creating the effect of
'fading in'. The fact that multiphonics behave in this way offers the performer a choice as to
which pitch or interval within this multiphonic can be emphasised, depending on its role in
the context of the work as a whole. For instance if the lower partial is a pitch which the
performer deems to be important to the work, but in practice it is the softest due to the
nature of the multiphonic, the performer can manipulate the other partials to bring this
pitch to the foreground; thereby realising the performer's interpretation of the piece as they
understand it.
Likewise when choosing microtonal fingering combinations the performer can elect to
employ different fingering systems found within pedagogical texts such as Weiss & Netti's
24
The Techniques of Saxophone Playing (2010) and Jean-Marie Londeix's Hello! Mr. Sax
(1989) in order to achieve the exact microtonal interval desired. As the use of microtones in
each specific work differs, then the emphasis of each microtonal interval can also be treated
differently; a performer can augment or diminish the interval in order to highlight the
distance between two pitches, or can choose microtones close to a regularly tempered pitch
to highlight the proximity of these two sounds.
These decisions can be used by the performer to an artistic advantage based upon an
understanding of the composition, as Eric Clarke describes in his article Expression in
Performance:
Although the structure of a composition determines… [the] field within which an

interpreter can operate, the performer has the capacity within that field to
manipulate the acoustical and temporal realisation
(Clarke, 1995 p.51)
It is by considering the exact degree of this manipulation, as well as the understanding of
the physiology of the larynx and tongue positions required, with reference to the musical
context of the technique within the composition that performers are able to present a
controlled and accurate interpretation. Through manipulation of physiology and an
understanding of the acoustical aspects of each extended technique performers can
manipulate the acoustical aspects of the music within the boundaries set by the composer.
By highlighting pitch relationships; microtonal qualities; and exploiting the behaviour of the
reed, the performer can present a nuanced and accurately produced interpretation of the
extended technique the work calls for.
Edison Denisov Sonata for Alto Saxophone and Piano (1973): An

Early Use of Multiphonics
This manipulation of extended techniques can be demonstrated by looking at the first use of
saxophone multiphonics in Denisov's Sonata for alto saxophone (1973), where the first
multiphonic of movement II is pitched to the notes A4 a quartertone sharp, B5 and F#6
(figure 2). The note F#6 is also the last note in the saxophone part of the previous
25
movement and so it is important to make this note prominent whilst playing the
multiphonic.
Fig.2 Edison Denisov Sonata for Alto Saxophone and Piano (1973) mvmt 2 line 1
This pitch is emphasised using the tongue and the oral cavity (as if the saxophonist is
singing the pitch) whilst adopting a specific tongue position which allows the partials to
sound underneath the note. This technique is demonstrated in figure 3 (Kientzy multiphonic
number 115), where to the far right of column 7 the concert A5 is sounded before the other
partials appear. When performing the multiphonic in this way the whole multiphonic is
sounded but the highest note of the multiphonic is the most prominent (track 2).
Fig.3 Kientzy multiphonic number 115 for alto as taken from Les Sons Multiples Aux Saxophones (2003)
The multiphonic at the beginning of movement II, as shown in figure 2, can be seen as an
echo of the final phrase of movement I (displayed in figure 4). The performer may wish to
take this into account by performing the multiphonic with this note emphasised. Ensuring
the prominence of this linking note is, however, problematic as the multiphonic requires
such specificity in oral cavity manipulation to produce. It is noticeable when performing this
multiphonic that, as with most multiphonics, the lower notes try to speak first as they are
closer to the stronger fundamental pitch. In order to gauge where the multiphonic lies
within the different tongue positions (described in chapter 2), the performer needs to learn
the 'feel' of the tongue position in order to sound the multiphonic accurately. There is also
26
Fig.4 Edison Denisov Sonata for Alto Saxophone and Piano (1973) mvmt 1 bb.116-117
a noticeable change in lip position as the bottom lip needs to extend slightly further forward
in order to produce the note, adopting a similar position as playing in the altissimo register.
If these subtle changes cannot be memorised then an effect of 'fading in' the upper notes of
the chord will be heard, as the performer searches through the partials and arrives at the
correct sound. This would mean that the F#5 which links the first movement to the second
would be the last note we hear, rather than the strongest note of the multiphonic. It could
be argued that this 'fading in' effect is exactly what Denisov wanted as he has marked the
multiphonic with hairpins rising from piano back down to pianissimo throughout the duration
of the multiphonic. It is probable that in close collaboration with Jean-Marie Londeix (for
whom the piece was written) Denisov was aware that this particular multiphonic could not
be attacked with all partials sounding at such a low dynamic, and therefore the crescendo
and decrescendo indication is used to indicate the 'fading in' and 'fading out' of this
multiphonic.
In each of three existing recordings of Denisov's Sonata for Alto Saxophone (1973), the
performers have chosen different approaches to the first multiphonic of movement II. Each
require different tongue manipulations in order to achieve each effect. The recording by
Dutch saxophonist Arno Bornkamp shows the use of the 'bottom upwards' approach during
the first multiphonic (track 3). This interpretation allows Bornkamp to achieve a niente entry
on the lowest fundamental, followed by a swell as the higher harmonics are brought in
27
(which are naturally louder) before losing them again to complete his phrase. The lowest
note in most multiphonics is usually the strongest sound and so Bornkamp uses this to his
advantage by using subtone (a technique which is discussed in chapter 1 in the section
entitled 'Embouchure techniques') to keep the beginning of his phrase quiet and then
moving his tongue into position to complete the multiphonic following the contours of the
hairpins.
In contrast to this British saxophonist John Harle decides to bring the multiphonic with all
harmonics present as the score depicts, but by doing this he sacrifices the pianissimo
marking of the first entry (track 4).
Track 5 of the accompanying CD is taken from a third recording of the movement by French
saxophonist Claude Delangle, who can be heard starting the multiphonic on the highest
partial (F#5), sounding the other partials after this note has been sounded. This 'top down'
approach to the multiphonic is, in effect, the direct opposite of Bornkamp's interpretation.
These varied approaches show that a performer can display an awareness of the role a
technique plays within a composition, whilst still retaining the freedom to manipulate the
acoustical and temporal aspects of the passage to suit their individual interpretation, as
Clarke (1995) suggests. It is the understanding and mastery of acoustical and physiological
manipulations that allow the performer to manipulate extended techniques and thus retain
interpretative control. If indeed the score is a representation of a sound that exists beyond
the visual constraints of written music as Lester (1995) suggests, and that the resulting
music can only be experienced by a listener in a single moment in time which cannot then
be re-examined, the performer's choices of how to perform extended techniques based
upon their understanding of the composition are significant. Each saxophonist performing
Denisov's sonata has decided to highlight different relationships within the pitches of the
opening multiphonic of Movement II; emphasising the difference of opinion as to the
28
importance of specific relationships within the music. Each performer understands the
extended technique sufficiently enough to manipulate how it sounds, using tongue position
and embouchure adjustment to accurately create a sound that is appropriate for their
interpretation. The relationship between the physical manipulation of extended techniques,
and the artistic role this manipulation plays in the context of the composition as a whole, is
important in underlining the artistic decisions a performer has made in order to realise an
interpretation.
29
Chapter 1
An Investigation Into Materials Relating to the
Usage of Extended Techniques Within
Compositions with an Emphasis on Pedagogy,
Repertoire and Research
Extended Woodwind Technique

One of the first major studies of extended techniques for woodwind instruments is Bruno
Bartolozzi's New Sounds for Woodwind (1967), in which the author categorises 'new sound'
techniques in two ways: monophonic and multiphonic possibilities. These categories cover
techniques such as harmonics, multiphonics, quartertones and timbral manipulations by
referring simply to their multiphonic or monophonic qualities. There are, however, many
other variables involved in the production of these techniques which require more
explanation and discussion than Bartolozzi provides in his single volume covering the four
orchestral woodwind instruments. Expanding on Bartolozzi's observations are a number of
instrument-specific manuals which explore the different techniques available to each
instrument and offer some discussion regarding the main approaches to the alteration of the
instrument's fundamental sound. In each of these texts the authors have presented tables
of fingerings for both monophonic (harmonics/micro-tones) and multiphonic possibilities of
the instrument in question and this presents the bulk of the information for the
instrumentalist.
In The Avant-Garde Flute (1974) by Thomas Howell, the author presents the reader with a
list of fingerings for no less than 1826 multiphonics, and descriptive notes which outline
each multiphonic's individual behaviour. The list of fingerings that appear in The Other Flute
(1989) by Robert Dick also demonstrate the reliance woodwind players have on fingerings
by first presenting all possible alternative fingerings for the regular chromatic scale, and
commenting through a simple key their relative effectiveness at varying dynamics. Dick also
takes into account the strength of the air sound within each pitch, assigning the sound a
30
number from 1 being slightly breathy to 5 being extremely breathy. A similar numerical
legend is used in Dick's multiphonic charts with a numbering guide for ease of production
where 1 is 'produced very easily with all pitches starting simultaneously' to 5 which is
'produced with great difficulty with a delay of 3 seconds or longer before all pitches sound'
(Dick, 1989, p.viii). He goes on to outline further scales for stability and modulation before
giving the reader his classification of multiphonics in relation to lip opening and tension. This
classification is as follows:
Class I: generally the lowest two pitches produced by a given fingering,

usually forming an interval of a sixth to a tenth.
Class II: generally the second and third lowest pitches produced by a given
fingering, usually forming an interval of a fourth to sixth.
Class III: generally the third and fourth lowest pitches produced by a given
fingering, usually forming the interval of a third to fifth.
Class IV: generally the fourth and fifth or fifth and sixth lowest pitches
produced by a given fingering, usually forming an interval of a third to sixth.
(R. Dick, 1989, p.viii)
This classification is indicative of the sorts of manipulations that can be achieved within
multiphonics based on the flute and its particular harmonic series and method of sound
production, whereas the reed player who plays on a closed tube which produces different
harmonics must manipulate the sound using the tongue and throat rather than the lips.
This difference is acknowledged in The Techniques of Oboe Playing (1994) by Peter Veale
and Claus-Steffan Mahnkopf, wherein the authors include a diagram for each multiphonic
indicating how much of the reed is to be in the mouth for each multiphonic to speak. This
book also has many fingering charts, however, the sections that discuss the various
techniques refer to them in a great deal more detail by taking into account the acoustics of
the instrument. For example the authors present us with the following equation for
multiphonics:
f=nA+mB n = 0, ±1, ±2, ±3 … up to approx. 10
m = 0, ±1, ±2, ±3 … up to approx. 6
however, f is always > 0
Here the two sinusoids A and B are always treated with a secondary value of n and m
respectively, and each of these secondary values can be plus or minus up to ten or six
31
cents respectively in their intonation. This means that the frequency f is the result of
various combination tones within the multiphonic as a result of heterodyne relationships;
this phenomena and a further exploration of the resultant sounds will be covered in more
detail in chapter 2, section 2. New Directions for Clarinet (1977) by Philip Rehfeldt also
categorises multiphonics and applies that category within his fingering chart which shows
the multiphonics possible from a lower fundamental. Rehfeldt also illustrates what Howell
refers to as 'miscellaneous special effects' such as glissandi and bisbigliando, outlining what
is possible on all sizes of clarinet for each technique. The manipulation of multiphonics is
described in both Daniel Kientzy's Les Sons Multiples Aux Saxophones (2003) and Pierre-
Yves Artaud's La Flûte Multiphonique (1995). Both of these books deal with multiphonic
trills, harmonics within the multiphonic and embouchure control. The extensive array of
techniques listed by Daniel Kientzy in his study L'Art du Saxophon (1993) taken from his full
text Saxologie (2002, which has never been translated from its native French), outlines the
possible techniques available to a composer, complemented by examples of their notation
and a recording of each technique. This list of over 100 different techniques does not serve
as a teaching aid to saxophonists; rather, it simply makes the reader aware of what can be
achieved with no real detail of how the effect is to be executed. The introduction states that
'the present work is not a modern saxophone method (such a work has still to be written)...
nonetheless [it] deals with no less than 100 playing techniques' (Kientzy, 1993 p.97). Books
have been written that attempt to fill the gap outlined by Kientzy by providing exercises and
excerpts from compositions as examples from which both composer and performer can
learn. One such general technique book that is written as a tutor book for performers and
composers alike is The Techniques of Saxophone Playing by Marcus Weiss and Giorgio Netti
(2010) in which the authors categorise saxophone techniques as follows:
Table 1: Classifications of extended techniques as taken from Weiss & Netti (2010)
Single Tones Microtones, eighth-tone scales, altissimo and timbral fingerings

Multiphonics Basics, fingering charts, performance of multiphonics
Performance Articulations, sound and embouchure techniques, teeth on the reed,
Techniques trills and tremoli, harmonics, glissandi, key percussion and singing
whilst playing
32
It is noteworthy that harmonics in Netti and Weiss' book are classed as a performance
technique whereas other texts treat the harmonics as a fundamental skill on which other
techniques are built. This demonstrates the dual nature of this text as being a learning aid
to both performers who need to learn the technique and composers who may wish to
employ it in a composition. A similar categorisation of technique is clear from the contents
page of Londeix's book Hello Mr. Sax! (1989):
Table 2: Classifications of extended techniques as taken from Londeix (1989)
Pitch Pitch, range, altissimo, trills and tremolos, 1/3, ¼ and 1/5 tones,
simultaneous sounds or multiphonics, tuning
Timbre Timbre, flutter-tonguing, bisbigliando, vibrato, trumpet-like
sounds, key clicks and pad sounds, other timbres, aeolian
sounds
Duration Duration, continuous or circular breathing
Articulation Most commonly used articulation
Volume Soft dynamics for saxophone, dynamics
Attacks Polymorphical transients of a musical tone, types of sounds
which can be produced on the saxophone, staccato markings,
musical examples
In both cases the authors seek to inform the reader of the sonic possibilities of the
saxophone by suggesting fingerings and notations they think best suited to the task. Both
texts share common ground in their identification of extended techniques which I will
identify in four broad groups:
Table 3: Classifications of extended techniques as compiled as a combination of Weiss & Netti (2010) and Londeix's
(1989) suggestions
Pitch Altissimo
Harmonics (Aeolian Sounds)
Mictrotones
Multiple Pitch Singing and playing
Multiphonics
Timbre Techniques Timbral fingerings (Bisbigliando)
Embouchures techniques
Key percussion
Flutter tongue
Duration Techniques Slap tongue (short duration)
Circular breathing (long duration)
33
Pitch Techniques
In order to expand on the techniques described in the above table, this next section will
discuss each of the extended techniques in more detail with reference to both pedagogical
texts, and the repertoire which use them.
Altissimo
One of the earliest modifications of technique in the saxophone repertoire is that of
extending the range beyond the limitation of the instrument and into the altissimo register.
It is thought that the addition of the extra key which allows saxophonists to hit the note
F#6 came into standard production in the 1950s with the advent of Selmer's 'Mark VI'
model. Before this saxophonists could only achieve the note F6 without making any
alterations to their technique. Evidence of altissimo writing appears as early as 1935 with
Jacques Ibert's Concertino Da Camera. Figure 1.1 shows a passage from movement II of
the work which requires the saxophone to play nearly a whole octave above the established
range of the instrument. Altissimo writing can also be found during the closing phrases of
Glazunov's Concerto for Alto Saxophone written around the same time (see figure 1.2).
Fig.1.1 Jaques Ibert Concertino da Camera Movement II bb.24-30
Both of these pieces were written for the saxophonist Sigurd Rascher who was pioneering
altissimo playing around this time, leading to the publication of his book Top Tones for
Fig.1.2 Alexander Glavunov Concerto for Alto Saxophone figure 55 bb.4-7
the Saxophone (1941) in which he presented saxophonists with the first complete
methodology by which this extended range could be reached. In the foreword to the first
34
edition of this book, Rascher explains: 'the production of tones higher than top F is based on
the principle of “harmonics”, so called because the first six tones in any overtone gamut
form a major chord' (1941 p.4). In order to continue ascending into the altissimo register
the saxophonist must learn a completely different style of blowing their instrument which
involves correct placement of the tongue and larynx. This physical manipulation of the air
stream results in the tone being split into its harmonics, and as Rascher goes on to state in
the foreword to the second edition of the same book (1961):
I have spoken to many an enthusiastic saxophone player who aimed for a high
register. Without exception, the student who fails to comprehend the prime
importance of the development of the “inner ear” - “tone imagination”,
“concept of tone” - also fails to produce, let alone master, the high register'
(Rascher, 1961 p.4).
Eugene Rousseau's book Saxophone High Tones (1978) describes the technique of over-
blowing sixths whilst in the upper register of the saxophone in order to obtain the altissimo
range as depicted in the chart in figure 1.3. Rousseau claims that 'the great value of this
technique is three-fold: (1) as an aid for the development of a facility in playing high tones;
(2) as a marvellous way in which to develop embouchure and air control; (3) as an
enormous help in enhancing the saxophone tones in the range C#3 to F#3' (Rousseau,
1978 p.19). It is true that the established fingerings for these tones are versions of the
lower fundamental depicted in figure 1.3.
Steve Lacy notes in his book Findings (1994) that 'each harmonic overtone demands its own
formula of diaphragmatic pressure, labial position, wind direction, tongue placement,
hearing conception and the perception after. It is necessary to determine all of these
elements, one by one, over the course of years, until they become internalised and
automatic' (Lacy, 1994 p.17). In this statement Lacy describes the processes of
physiological manipulation a saxophonist must master in order to execute this technique.
However, he does not elaborate on this list of specific changes instead asserting that it will
35
take years to learn. It is common in such texts for the author to mention these changes but
not to acknowledge exactly what the saxophonist needs to alter for these techniques.
Specific processes pertaining to the altissimo range such as tongue position, throat position,
Fig.1.3 Technique of overblowing sixths taken from Eugene Rousseau's Saxophone High Tones (1978)
'inner ear' and harmonics will be explored in more detail in chapter 2, section 3 of this
thesis. The altissimo register has now become a feature of saxophone technique at higher
education level, and is extensively used in compositions. It is still, however, not a
requirement for amateur musicians and students to pass practical examinations on the
instrument; indeed the main UK music examining board does not make the requirement of
a two octave F# major or minor scale in their top grade (ABRSM exam syllabus 2011-2013),
even though most saxophones are capable of the note without needing to play in the
altissimo register.

Even though harmonics have been discussed as the foundation on which the altissimo
register is based, there are instances of the harmonic series being utilised in compositions.
Yoshimatsu asks for a harmonic glissando on the note E2 in his Fuzzy Bird Sonata (1995,
36
figure 1.4, track 6). It is also one of the closing gestures in Nicolas A. Huber's Aus Schmerz
und Trauer (1982), in which he instructs the saxophonist to reinforce the high overtones
('Oberton-Hohen verstarken') by applying pressure with the lip ('Tiefen mit Lippendruck
wegfiltern') until only the overtones remain ('nur noch Obertonfeld', track 7).
Fig.1.4 Takashi Yoshimatsu Fuzzy Bird Sonata (1995) p.1 line 4
Like Rascher and Rousseau the composer notates the fundamental to be used, with the
second partial suggested and then a special graphic for the overtones (figure 1.5). This
glissando is achieved by moving very quickly through the tongue positions required for each
partial, which involves moving the tongue upward and forward in the mouth. This action
constricts the flow of air into the instrument by increasing
Fig.1.5 Nicolaus A. Huber Aus Schmerz und Trauer (1982) p.11 b.5
the pressure surrounding it thus increasing the velocity of the air. This principle of fluid
dynamics will also be described in more detail in chapter 2, section 3. Using the throat and
tongue in this way makes the saxophone's harmonic series very flexible thus allowing the
saxophonist to easily glissando in this high register. This technique is used in Fuminori
Tanada's Mysterious Morning III (1996, figure 1.6) to create 'aeolian sounds' following a
drawn line for the pitches to be sounded to a specific rhythm (track 8).
37
Mike Vaughan's Ensphered (1990) also uses this technique within a tremolo to emulate the
electronic sounds of his tape part. Vaughan notates the tremolo and includes the direction
'gradually introduce successive harmonics' and then 'reduce harmonics' (figure 1.7, track
9). Both Rascher's and Rousseau's books acknowledge the throat and embouchure
manipulations that need to occur in order to play the harmonic series.
Fig.1.7 Mike Vaughan Ensphered (1990) b.9
To this end Rascher introduces the concept of playing in the altissimo register using different
fundamentals (figure 1.8). This technique demonstrates how partials from a different
fundamental can be used to add a different tone colour to the passage, much like a violin
Fig.1.8 Demonstration of playing on different partials (represented numerically) from Sigurd Rascher's Top Tones
for the Saxophone (1941)
would when using natural harmonics. This technique is used in Yoshihisa Taïra's Pénombres
VI (1996) where the first three notes in the saxophone part are different versions of the
note A6, the regular fingering (an overblown C6 as in Rascher and Rousseau's charts) and a
38
harmonic version which can be played as the fourth partial of D4. This highlights the
different textures between these two versions of the same pitch (figure 1.9, track 10).
Microtones
Due to the mechanics of the saxophone, and the absence of open tone holes, the microtonal
possibilities of the instrument are somewhat limited. Londeix states that 'because of the
current state of instrumental manufacturing, 1/3, 1/4 and 1/5 tones and micro-intervals
cannot be obtained on all saxophones' (Londeix, 1989 p.24). The saxophone is capable of
playing microtones by flattening the note above the desired microtone, thereby an F can
become an F quarter-tone flat by the addition of a key lower than the pitch (this principle is
described in greater detail in chapter 2, section 2). Because of these reasons the instrument
is simply incapable of producing certain quarter-and-eighth-tones.
Weiss & Netti state that 'with the exception of a few tones in the lower register
(approximately the lowest fifth of the saxophone's range), as well as the microtones
between G and G# (for purely mechanical reasons), quartertone as well as eighth-tones are
possible on the saxophone' (Weiss and Netti, 2010 p.15). The authors go on to explain how:
for the quarter-tone between G and G#, there is no “standard” fingering. One
can, however, eliminate the mechanical connection from G to C#, as well as the
closing mechanism of the G# key. If one prefers not to do this, the only
possibility remaining, besides pure embouchure correction (letting the G# fall
by a quarter-tone), is to finger a g# and let the fingernail of the index finger of
the right hand on the edge of the tone hole of the F or F# key and closing it
39
until it touches the fingernail. This fingering with half key is complicated, but it
is, in fact, a fingering
(Weiss and Netti, 2010 p.15)
The solution I use for this is indeed an alteration of the mechanism surrounding the G# key
(as described in the next chapter). However, examples of embouchure correction can be
seen in Denisov's Sonata for Alto Saxophone (1973, figure 1.10). Londeix and Denisov
collaborated closely on this work and so it is not surprising to find the instruction 'Lâcher les
lèvres' appearing in Londeix's book in regards to quartertones. It is thought that Denisov's
Sonata is amongst the first works to use quartertones in the saxophone's repertoire, and
Fig.1.10 Edison Denisov Sonata for Alto Saxophone and Piano (1973) movement II line 4
since then these microtones have become a common tool for composers. Ryo Noda's
compositions use micro-intervals in close juxtaposition with tempered pitches to highlight
the sonic difference (figure 1.11). In a similar way microtones are used in Ichiro Nodaira's
Arabesque III (1983) to highlight the tempered nature of the piano. Figure 1.12
demonstrates the use of dissonance between the saxophone's C three quartertones sharp
and the piano's C sharps, giving the passage the effect of a descending microtonal scale
between the piano's D, the saxophone's C three quartertones sharp and the piano's C sharp.
Fuminori Tanada's Mysterious Morning III (1996) uses microtones to highlight its main
theme of ascending and descending microtonal scales and trills/tremolos.
Fig.1.11 Ryo Noda Maï (1975) p.1 line 1 and p.4 line 2
40
Figure 1.13 shows the notation Tanada uses for his ascending micro-tonal trills, highlighting
the pitches over the rhythmic duration of each trill. Tanada uses different notations
throughout the work depending on his desired effect of 'anxiousness' as stated in his notes;
figure 1.13 also demonstrates this notation. To this end a performer can choose between
alternate fingering systems to alter the sonic behaviour of these microtones, which can
highlight the anxiousness that the composer wishes the performer to convey.
Fig.1.12 Ichiro Nodaira Arabesque III (1983) b.130
Multiphonic Techniques
Singing and Playing
It is common for saxophonists in rock, pop and jazz music to vary the timbre of their
instrument by humming or singing whilst they play. This technique which is referred to in
Delangle and Michat's article The Contemporary Saxophone in The Cambridge Companion to
the Saxophone (ed. Richard Ingham, 1998) as 'growling' is well established in all styles of
saxophone playing. In order to achieve the growl the instrumentalist does not need to be
specific in their vocalisation in order to change the timbre of their instrument. Composers
41
have, however, used this technique more imaginatively in order to create contrapuntal or
homogenous musical lines between voice and saxophone, or to match both pitches closely
together in order to achieve beating patterns within the sound. An example of both of these
utilisations can be found in Tanada's Mysterious Morning III (1996, track 11). In figure 1.14
the saxophonist is asked to follow the descending demisemiquaver motif with their voice,
this colours the sound of a passage which is also being played using flutter-tonguing thus
distorting the pitch even further. Then in figure 1.15 the composer has notated the vocal
pitch to be the same as the saxophone's pitch yet either up or down a microtone (track 12).
The composer indicates that 'the voice part should be sung very
slightly higher or lower than the instrumental line so as to create beats' (Nodira, 1996).
Other works use the instrumentalist's voice to augment the sound of the passage as on
page 4 of Betsy Jolas' Épisode Quatrième (1983). Here the saxophonist is to sing in unison
with the instrument whilst the instrument shifts up one tone creating a major second
interval as in figure 1.16 (track 13).
42
Fig.1.16 Betsy Jolas Épisode Quatrième (1983) p.4 line 5
The intervallic nature of singing and playing is further exploited in figure 1.17 of the same
piece where the sung interval expands to a minor sixth above the saxophone. This is one
way that composers can achieve intervals whilst composing for a monophonic instrument;
however, singing or 'chanté' can also be used in a melodic fashion as shown in Taïra's
Pénombres VI (1996, track 14).
Multiphonics
In a literal sense the act of singing and playing could be seen as a multiphonic as there are
indeed multiple discernible sounds. However, singing and playing requires two separate
resonators to create each sound: the vocal cords of the saxophonist and the reed of the
instrument. The phenomena of multiphonics in the sense of instrumental technique involves
multiple discernible sounds from a single resonator - the saxophone's reed. The saxophone
is capable of creating a number of multiphonic 'chords' that are produced through a
combination of special fingerings and specific air-flow/tongue placement so as to create a
disturbance in the air column that produces multiple sounds simultaneously.
These multiphonics by their very nature can be very delicate to produce, requiring a large
amount of specificity in the saxophonist's preparation for them to sound at all. This fact very
often limits the overall dynamic level at which a multiphonic can be produced before the
43
phenomena becomes unstable, depending on whether the multiphonic is an unstable dyad
or a more stable spread of notes, typically involving the interval of a minor ninth or minor
twelfth. It is often necessary to classify the multiphonics in some way in order to
contextualize them in a performers practise regime. John Gross does this in his book
Multiphonics for the Saxophone (1998) by referring to the amount of discernible tones that
can be heard in each multiphonic and splitting them into three groups: '3-noters', '2-noters'
and '4-and More-noters'. The author also provides a rough indication of the tones to be
expected but vitally he indicates a 'target note' at which the saxophonist should pitch the
multiphonic in order for it to sound. This is important because the specific manipulation
needed within the oral cavity of the saxophonist is crucial in the production of multiphonics
just as it is in the production of harmonics, and this manipulation can often be achieved by
imagining the singing of a note and thus tuning the vocal tract; a concept that will be
explored in chapter 2, section 3. Gross' book is unique in that it does not separate
multiphonics by type of saxophone, instead it asserts that each multiphonic can be
performed on each saxophone relying heavily on the target note and therefore the oral
cavity manipulation.
Other books which catalogue multiphonics do so by providing detailed microtonal
transcriptions of each sound. Londeix's Hello! Mr. Sax (1989) provides a number of
multiphonic fingerings for each type of saxophone from soprano to baritone. These
multiphonics are ordered in groups of fingering types which demonstrates how the addition
of a single key can, in many instances, transform one multiphonic into another. As these
multiphonics are all based on fundamental tones this system of organisation results in the
gradual ascension of the resultant multiphonics. Londeix also includes dynamic levels at
which the multiphonics can be performed, noting that the sounds have a tendency to 'split'
when these dynamic limitations are breached. This is also noted in Kientzy's Les Sons
Multiples Aux Saxophones (2003) in which the author presents the multiphonics in a table
which includes: written and sounding pitches, ease of repetition, fingering, trill possibilities
44
and possible separation within the sounds. There are, however, only limited attempts to
indicate how the performer is to achieve these possible gestures, other than an indication to
expose more of the reed into the mouth, or that a sound produces an airy tone. Kientzy's
book lists over one hundred multiphonics for each size of saxophone from sopranino to bass
in this way, and its level of detail has made it invaluable to composers who wish to use
multiphonics in their work. Building on the detail of Kientzy is Weiss and Netti's book (2010)
which goes further into describing the resultant sound of each fingering as dictated by the
saxophonist's oral preparation and fingering combinations. The way Weiss and Netti do this
is through the use of symbols which signify a multiphonic type, the basic incarnation of
which is laid out in the following table.
Table 4: Basic classifications of multiphonics as taken from Weiss & Netti (2010)
Fingering tube without openings; conventional fingerings (low Bb, B, C, C#)
A Layer of natural overtones over a fundamental

Fingering tube with one or more openings; non-conventional fingerings
B Sound with strong oscillation

C Wide dyad, stable
D Aggregate of two or more partials over a fundamental
E Narrow dyad
This classification of the multiphonic goes a long way to indicate the timbre and sound of
the multiphonic as well as giving specific notations for each. The way composers have used
multiphonics has developed over the last forty years, as Weiss & Netti remarks: 'what began
as the use of opaque blocks of sound functioning as contrast or even interference within the
flow of monodic music has developed, in certain cases, into a material that has become fully
Table 5: Further classifications of extended techniques as taken from Weiss & Netti (2010)
Type Track on Description

the CD
Ba 15 Detuned octave and twelfth, creating a stable oscillation, open and
fast; p-ff
CE 16 Dyad between a fourth and fifth' stable; p-ff
Ce 17 Dyad between a minor sixth and seventh, stable; pp-p
Cb 18 Approximately an octave, with the possible presence of the twelfth,
45
usually unstable; pp-p
C 19 Between a minor ninth and an eleventh (octave + fourth), stable;
pp-mp
D/B 20 Wide multiphonic, usually built on a minor ninth (also second),
partly oscillating; mp-ff
Da 21 Wide multiphonic, usually built on a ninth (also tenth, third or
fourth), stable; p-ff
E 22 Triads; ppp-p
Eb 23 Seconds, as minor seconds usually oscillating strongly, with the
possible presence of a low fundamental tone ppp; ppp-mp
integrated within the musical discourse' (Weiss & Netti, 2010 p.57). This is true of some
earlier compositions where the multiphonic interest in a phrase is almost entirely in the
interest of creating a 'special effect' as in Jindrich Feld's Sonata (1990). Movement three
features a passage which uses multiphonics based on certain fundamentals (mostly 'B' type
as above) to complete the phrase. However, the ossia of optional flutter tonguing suggests
that the composer requires a textural change to the fundamental rather than the addition of
specific partials above that fundamental (figure 1.18). Also the use of in-specific
multiphonics in the works of Joe Cutler, where the composer stipulates that the performer
should play multiphonics on a stipulated fundamental in works such as Sal's Sax (1995) and
Screaming 229a (1996), suggests an interest in the timbral effect of multiphonics, rather
than the specific intervals inherent within the phenomena.
As Weiss & Netti have stated above, multiphonics have been embraced by composers
largely in two ways: as a 'block' of sound interrupting the line of music or as an integrated
sound. The use of multiphonics as a 'block' of sound can be found in the second movement
of Denisov's Sonata for Alto Saxophone and Piano (1973) where the composer uses
multiphonics of type Ba alongside monodic lines which share pitches with the multiphonic.
Nicolaus A. Huber uses multiphonics to introduce or end sections in his work Aus Schmerz
und Trauer (1982). These multiphonics are long 'block' chords of type Ba creating a strident
oscillation and a de-tuned octave and a twelfth. Other examples of 'block' multiphonics are
also found in Ryo Noda's Maï (1975) where the penultimate section is comprised entirely of
46
type Ba multiphonics which share pitches at the extremities of the multiphonic but change
subtly in the inner pitches (Figure 1.19).
Fig.1.18 Jindrich Feld Sonata for Alto Saxophone (1990) Movement III bb.48-61
Fig.1.19 Ryo Noda Maï (1975) p.4 lines 3-5
Fuminori Tanada uses type Ba multiphonics in his composition Mysterious morning III
(1996) to further develop his theme of descending trills and tremolos. Each multiphonic he
uses shares common extremities of pitch (the top and bottom) yet the inner parts descend
in semitones. This is a solid example of a grouping of fingerings which alter multiphonics of
a similar type (Figure 1.20). Tanada also demonstrates the malleability of multiphonics of
this type through the use of isolating a single pitch within it. The multiphonic in figure 1.21
47
demonstrates a particular feature of type Ba multiphonics in that a single tone can be
isolated at the top extremity of the multiphonic by maintaining the fingering and altering
Fig.1.20 Fuminori Tanada Mysterious Morning III (1996) p.6 lines 3 and 4
the tongue position alone (track 24). The technique is used in this instance alongside the
trill which features throughout the piece, and so without altering the fingering both the top
pitch of the multiphonic and the trill are maintained. Similar isolation of single pitches can
be found in Claude Delangle's transcription of Berio's Sequenza VII (1969), renamed
Sequenza VIIb and transcribed in 2003. In this example (figure 1.22, track 25) the pitch D3
is common to two different multiphonics.
48
Multiphonics of a different type are explored alongside type Ba multiphonics in Christian
Lauba's Savane, one of his Neuf Études (1996). In this piece multiphonics of type C and Cb
(unstable dyads of an octave or a twelfth) are used in the first section of the piece. These
dyads then contract into multiphonics of type CE and Ce (minor fourth, fifth, sixth or
seventh dyads) until reaching the more familiar type Ba multiphonic. Lauba also includes
multiphonics of type Eb creating intervals of a major or minor second or third; this is the
smallest interval in the piece and the point at which his contraction of multiphonics ends
(figure 1.23). The main feature of this composition is the usage of multiphonics of various
types to create an ever contracting set of intervals throughout the piece.
Fig.1.23 Christian Lauba's Savane (1996) p.7 line 2
John Coltrane's track Harmonique from his album Coltrane Jazz (1961, track 26) includes a
dyad of type Ce integrated into the melodic line. This pioneering use of the technique is an
enduring testament to the melodic capabilities of the technique, appearing on record ten
years before the use of multiphonics in Denisov's Sonata for Alto Saxophone and Piano
(1973). In his study entitled A Thesaurus of Saxophone Multiphonics and a Guide to their
Practical Application (1998) Boyd Allan Phelps catalogues the usage of multiphonics
49
alongside conventional jazz harmony, implying that multiphonics can be used as chords or
double stops. There are perhaps inevitable problems with this usage as the multiphonic
timbre is often complex, the result of multiple harmonic spectra being produced
simultaneously. Phelps' theory gets around this problem by implying multiple extensions to
the chords in order for the multiphonic to fit. Figure 1.24 shows Phelps' suggested
multiphonics for C minor and C major chords. Immediately we can see that the chords
become increasingly extended up to C minor seven added ninth and eleventh. This
extension explains the presence of an F and D in the first example. There then follows some
examples of tonic/dominant chords which would be more useful; however, when performing
the C major multiphonics the ear can detect that the presence of an F which would be an
eleventh extension, not a sharp eleven as stated. It is possible that Bert Wilson, the
saxophonist with whom Phelps worked, was able to suppress these tones with his tongue
and throat placement. Phelps' catalogue also includes noted instances of audible additional
tones by his indication of 'non-chord tones' as in figure 1.25. These are tones that Phelps
and Wilson are willing to ignore in order to outline the harmony indicated, suggesting that
these multiphonics are more timbral in nature than requiring exact tuning.
Fig.1.24 Suggested multiphonics to fit over C major and C minor chords taken from Phelps' A Thesaurus of
Saxophone Multiphonics and a Guide to their Practical Application (1998)
50
Fig.1.25 Suggested multiphonics to fit over E half-diminished and E diminished chords taken from Phelps' A
Thesaurus of Saxophone Multiphonics and a Guide to their Practical Application (1998)
Timbre Techniques
Timbral Fingerings and Bisbigliando
Timbral fingerings (or 'false' fingerings) are fingering combinations that allow for a single
tone to be sounded with various timbres, and are a mixture of harmonics as described
previously and the use of other keys to flatten or sharpen the note to produce the effect of
a 'brighter' or 'darker' sound respectively. Ronald Caravan outlines how alternative
fingerings are used in conventional repertoire for reasons of both intonation and timbre:
'the issues of pitch and timbre should influence the decision of the performer regarding
when to employ an alternative fingering. In respect to pitch, the musician can take
advantage of the minute differences which occur among the various fingering alternatives...
and achieve shadings which may be appropriate or even necessary in numerous situations'
(Caravan, 1974 p.164). Caravan goes on to explain that 'selecting an alternative fingering
because of timbre considerations is an important but less frequently employed practice.
Often a fingering other than that which the performer usually uses for a particular note will
enable him to execute a passage with greater homogeneity of tone quality' (Caravan, 1974
51
p.170). Never is this more apparent than when a passage goes over the break of the
instrument. Here the saxophonist is encouraged to use the first partial of C4 or C#4 (often
known as 'closed' C or C#) to maintain the timbre of the passage. Caravan also
acknowledges the importance of alternative or 'false' fingerings as 'raw material for
composers'. Luciano Berio's Sequenza IXb (1980) uses the technique as a rhythmic device,
wherein the tone is coloured to highlight the rhythmic content of the phrase (see figure
1.26). Berio's Sequenza VIIb (2003) uses the technique in a slightly different way; the
Fig.1.26 Luciano Berio Sequenza Ixb (1980) p.5 line 7
saxophonist is required to find five alternative fingerings for the note C#5 which makes up
the material for most of the first line of the piece (figure 1.27). This pitch variance is the
nucleus from which the work grows ever outwards but ultimately returns back to this
important pitch. A similar device is used in Nicolaus A. Huber's Aus Schmerz und Trauer
(1982) where the composer has marked the tone C in certain passages with numbers from
one to eight, indicating that the higher the number the darker the resultant sound should be
from normal. This device is also present in the work Maknongan (1986) by Giacinto Scelsi,
where the difference between light ('cupo') and dark ('chiaro') over a single tone is executed
by using false fingerings on the baritone saxophone.
Embouchure Techniques
Embouchure techniques are techniques which alter the sound through manipulation of the
player's embouchure (the placement and manipulation of the lips) such as falls, smears,
subtone and vibrato. It is uncommon, yet not unheard of, for the composer to write for the
52
saxophone to be played without a mouthpiece in which case ram-tongue and trumpet sound
techniques can be employed. Ram-tongue simply consists of the saxophonist blowing down
the open crook of the saxophone and inserting their tongue at a high velocity into the
opening creating a percussive and airy pitched sound that can be altered by the keys. The
trumpet sound also works simply by operating the open end of the saxophone like a
trumpet by vibrating the lips directly into the opening. The resultant pitch can then also be
controlled by the keys, effectively turning it into an ophicleide-like instrument. Whilst both
of these techniques require the mouthpiece to be absent (although some players have
mastered the ram-tongue technique by inserting the tongue onto the reed of the
mouthpiece) the technique of subtone is often used and requires a very specific
embouchure. Weiss & Netti describe subtone as a sound which is weak in overtones used to
play softly in the lower registers. They describe two methods of execution:
1) Tongue on the reed: Here: the front part of the tongue or the tip or the tip
of the tongue is pressed against the reed. In doing so, the reed is muted and
the subtone is created. For this purpose, the lower lip must be turned a bit
outward. At the same time, the embouchure is very loose which also explains
why a transition to normal playing requires an adjustment... Air sounds
cannot always be completely excluded.
2) Little mouthpiece and loose embouchure: On the higher pitched
saxophones, in particular, it is easier to shorten the embouchure. This means
that the lower lip almost touches the edge of the reed, very little mouthpiece
is in the mouth and the embouchure is very loose. In this way the reed is
dampened and not fixed between the upper teeth and the lower lip as in the
normal embouchure... Here, too, the transition from the subtone embouchure
technique to normal embouchure cannot always be executed smoothly.
(Weiss & Netti 2010 p. 162).
Big band jazz players have been using this technique since the thirties and it is a part of
conventional jazz technique but the classical world makes a clear distinction between a
normal and a subtone. Figure 1.28 shows a use of the technique from Mark-Anthony
Turnage's Two Elegies Framing a Shout (1997) where the composer makes the clear
distinction between the passage that is to be played subtone and the passage that is to be
played ordinarily. Tanada's Mysterious Morning III (1996) employs subtone as a way of
exaggerating the extreme use of dynamic and timbre change (figure 1.29).
53
Fig.1.28 Mark-Anthony Turnage Two Elegies Framing a Shout (1997) movement 1 b.29
Key Percussion
The technique of key percussion is particularly effective on the saxophone as the large key
cups (required because of the saxophone's conical shape) allow a particularly resonant
sound; indeed, Weiss & Netti add that 'already during normal saxophone playing, key
sounds are often (too) clearly audible' (Weiss & Netti 2011 p.176). There are two types of
sound when using key percussion: a dryer sound involving slapping the keys whilst the
instrument is out of the mouth, and a more resonant 'popping' sound with the instrument in
the mouth. Weiss & Netti also note that 'for key slaps with a closed embouchure, close the
mouthpiece with the tongue; this reinforces the resonance' (Weiss & Netti, 2011 p.177).
This phenomena is used to effect in Pedro Itturalde's piece Pequena Czarda (1997) during
which the composer asks the saxophonist to keep the instrument out of the mouth whilst
performing the key percussion. This produces a sound which is pitched a minor third higher
than the note which is operated due to the lack of the standing wave in the instrument
(standing waves are explained in chapter 2, section 1). Figure 1.30 shows the application of
this in the score: the lower notes being played and the higher notes being sounded. I have
recorded the phrase shown in figure 1.30 (track 27) with the saxophone both held outside
and inside the mouth to highlight the change of sound. Key percussion is normally used as a
54
specific timbre as in Jindrich Feld's sonata (1989-1990, figure 1.31) where the saxophone's
key clicks are played alternately with tapping sounds
Fig.1.30 Pedro Itturalde Pequena Czarda (1997) p.3 lines 7 and 8
Fig.1.31 Jindrich Feld Sonata For Alto Saxophone and Piano (1989-1990) Mvmt II bb.48-51
from the piano to create a timbral duet between the two instruments. Key percussion also
has a place in electronic music as the percussive nature of the technique can be specifically
manipulated by a max/msp patch or similar computer programme. In Michael Clarke's
Enmeshed (2005) the tenor saxophone feeds the patch rhythmically-specific key slaps for
an entire section of the piece, the timbre of which punctuates the rest of the work as the
computer manipulates and then recycles the material (Figure 1.32).
55
Fig.1.32 Michael Clarke Enmeshed (2005) figure A
Flutter Tongue
Flutter tonguing is designed to disrupt the air stream of a pitch adding a rhythmic
disturbance to the sound. There are two ways of producing this effect: the first is by rolling
a Spanish 'rrr' with the tip of the tongue against the soft pallet, and the second is by
vibrating the soft palate against the back of the throat. Some people find it difficult, or even
impossible, to produce the effect with the tongue and so must rely on the second method of
production which produces a slightly less defined sound than the first method. An early use
of flutter tongue can be found in Denisov's Sonata for Alto Saxophone and Piano (1973)
where the composer uses it to emphasise the saxophone's line especially low down in its
register (figure 1.33).
Fig.1.33 Edison Denisov Sonata for Alto Saxophone and Piano (1973) movement III bb.69-70
56
Tanada uses the effect in his composition Mysterious Morning III (1996) to transform and
distort an already familiar phrase; resulting in a different timbre as depicted in figure 1.34.
Composers are beginning to understand the difference between the two methods of
production, and Aaron Cassidy's work Asphyxia (2000) makes use of both types
independently of each other through use of specific notations for each (figure 1.35).
Fig.1.35(a) Aaron Cassidy Asphyxia (2000) b.26
57
Fig 1.35(b) Aaron Cassidy Asphyxia (2000) b.30
Duration Techniques
Slap Tongue (Short)
This is a technique which uses the tongue to pull the reed abruptly away from the
mouthpiece to create a percussive sound as the reed hits the rails of the mouthpiece when
returning to its original position. The saxophonist does this by laying the tongue flat against
the reed and then curling it so that it is concave against the reed. This causes a small
vacuum between the reed and the tongue so when the tongue is pulled away the reed
follows it until the vacuum is broken. The elastic properties of the reed cause the reed to
snap back and thus create the 'slap'. Depending on the amount of air that is passed over
the reed at the same time, the slap tongue effect can be used either to punctuate short
percussive passages as in Christian Lauba's Jungle (1996, figure 1.36) or to begin a note
Fig.1.36 Christian Lauba Jungle (1996) p.14 line 8
with a percussive accent as in Betsy Jolas' Épisode Quatrième (1983, figure 1.37). Slap
tongue can also be used as a melodic device acting as an exaggerated articulation to normal
tones. This use of the technique is reminiscent of music-hall usage of the technique and can
58
Fig.1.37 Betsy Jolas Épisode Quatrième (1983) b.1
be found in the movement Old Sir Faulk from William Walton's Façade (1936, figure 1.38).
Weiss & Netti characterise the slap in three ways: a standard slap which is pitched; a secco
slap that is un-pitched (without air); and an open slap where the embouchure is opened
alongside the tongue attack; Weiss & Netti add the caveat that 'this articulation, too, is only
possible as a short sound since, of course, the embouchure is opened' (Weiss & Netti 2010
p.143, track 28).
Fig.1.38 William Walton Old Sir Faulk from Façade (1936) bb.14-15
Circular Breathing (Long)

The method of inhaling whilst expelling air through the instrument is a well known one, and
although there seems to be little documentation of its origins it is thought to have
developed through folk music. The technique itself involves holding air in the cheeks and
using this air to sound a tone whilst breathing in through the nose. The manipulation of the
soft palate and uvula to open or close access to the nasal cavity makes this possible,
resulting in the ability to play phrases that are much longer in duration than a normal lung-
full of air could sustain. In his book Circular Breathing for Woodwind Players (1979), Trent
Kynaston describes the types of breath players need to develop: 'High breath' involving the
top of the lungs and lifting the clavicles (collar bones); 'Middle breath' using the lungs and
expending outwards around the area of the rib-cage; 'low breath' which uses the diaphragm
and 'total breath' which mixes the previous three methods (Kynaston 1978, pp. 3-5). As
59
speed is a factor in circular breathing, it is recommended by Kynaston that the 'low breath'
technique is used so as to maximise the intake of air in the shortest amount of time
possible. Circular breathing can be found in a number of saxophone compositions, for
example Lauba's Balafon (1996) includes a constant stream of quavers which demands an
un-broken supply of air (figure 1.39). The technique of circular breathing is particularly
widely employed in improvised music, with saxophonists such as Evan Parker, Frank
Gratkowski and John Butcher using the technique extensively for solo playing.
Fig.1.39 Christian Lauba Balafon (1996) p.1 line 8
The techniques that are described here are the most common techniques which appear in
the saxophone's repertoire; other techniques such as: whistle sounds (extremely high tones
produced by constricting the reed with the embouchure, or placing the teeth on the reed);
unusual tongue articulations (tongue side to side or up and down); ram-tongue with the
reed in place; and trumpet sounds into the crook, have their place in improvised music but
have yet to become established in widely available notated repertoire. Each of these
techniques requires a specific physical manipulation for their production, using the tongue,
lips, embouchure, fingering combinations and diaphragm control. Unlike standard woodwind
instrumental technique these parts of the body play a much larger role in the production of
extended techniques. In order to produce an extended technique in this way, the performer
needs to understand how the techniques work acoustically, and thus be able to manipulate
them successfully through use of their physiology.
60
Chapter 2
The Acoustical Behaviour of Woodwind
Instruments: An Overview
When considering an approach to interpreting extended techniques in the saxophone's
repertoire, an understanding of the science behind these techniques is useful in helping the
performer produce the techniques accurately and manipulate them in such a way as the
score might demand. Many performers mention the 'feel' of a technique especially in
improvised music; performers such as John Butcher and Frank Gratkowski organise their
material in various ways depending upon the demands of the technique and the direction of
the music. John Butcher uses fingerings to move from one multiphonic to the other, and
similarly Gratkowski groups multiphonics together in order to travel efficiently between the
fingerings. In the case of written music, however, a performer is often faced with a
technique with which they are unfamiliar and therefore it is often necessary to learn the
technique from scratch; Rob Buckland acknowledges the importance of tongue position
when performing and preparing extended techniques whilst asserting that composers are
largely unaware of the physiological manipulations needed for such playing.
There are concepts that can contextualise what is needed in the preparation and execution
of these techniques for a performer and these concepts can be represented in two groups:
(1) understanding the acoustic phenomena behind the production of the techniques and (2)
understanding the physiological changes required by the saxophonist in order to manipulate
these techniques as the score requires. These manipulations can be very important to
individual performers' interpretations of a passage of music as each performer's physiology
is different from the next, giving differing vocal tract resonance, voice pitch and timbre,
tongue positioning and fingering choices depending upon the performer.
61
Part I: Acoustical Properties Common to All Woodwind Instruments
Tubes
When considering extended techniques on the saxophone it is worth noting that although
the instrument acts in a similar way to other woodwind instruments when playing
throughout its normal compass, when performing extended techniques a different mode of
acoustical phenomena is utilised. This means that although the clarinet and the saxophone
are similar in that they are single reed woodwind instruments, other factors affect this
acoustic phenomena which, in turn, affects the sounds that can be achieved. All woodwind
instruments fall into three categories: cylindrical tubes which are open at both ends (flute,
piccolo); cylindrical tubes which are closed at one end (Clarinet); and conical tubes that are
closed at one end (saxophone, oboe, bassoon). Bruno Bartolozzi (1982) outlines the
behaviour of woodwind instruments as 'the only ones which use a 'mixed' system of sound
production (i.e. fundamental tones for the lower register and various natural harmonics for
the upper registers)' (Bartolozzi, 1982 p.12). The woodwinds have the capability of
producing at least one entire octave of fundamental tones before it is necessary to use the
harmonic series, thus creating a 'mix' of fundamental and harmonic tones spanning their
entire compass. Bartolozzi continues by saying woodwind instruments therefore face the
'impossibility, with this traditional 'mixed' system of sound production, of obtaining any
sounds other than the fundamentals determined by the construction of the instrument and
their related harmonics' (Bartolozzi, 1982 p.12). Bartolozzi is making the observation here
that the construction of the instrument dictates the overall behaviour of the harmonics, and
this is relevant when considering extended techniques because the performer's choice of
mouthpiece, reed and instrument will have some effect on the harmonics produced and thus
the extended techniques that are the result of this combination. The amount of choice a
saxophonist has in terms of equipment, reeds, ligatures and mouthpieces is significant, and
this choice can drastically alter the sounds that result from this choice as will be
demonstrated later in this chapter.
62
Sound Waves From Pipes
The behaviour of the woodwind instrument's fundamental and harmonic tones can be better
understood by first examining the acoustical properties of open and closed pipes. The
difference between open and closed cylinders is typically exemplified by the flute (open
pipe) and clarinet (closed pipe). The flute's exposed embouchure hole makes the flute open
to the air at both ends of the instrument, whereas the clarinet mouthpiece results in a
closed pipe as the gap between the reed and the lay of the mouthpiece is in the performer's
mouth and is therefore pressurised by the player, meaning that it is open to the air at one
end of its length only. Chen, Smith and Wolf pose this question in their studies: why does
the lowest note of the clarinet sound nearly an octave (major seventh) lower than the flute
even though their tube lengths are nearly identical?1 To explain this one can observe the
behaviour of a pulse of air sent down a pipe which is open at both ends, during which the
following phenomena occurs:
[the air] reaches the end of the tube and its momentum carries it out into
the open air... it spreads out in all directions [and] its pressure falls very
quickly to nearly atmospheric pressure[.] However, it still has the momentum
to travel away from the end of the pipe... the result is that a pulse of high
pressure air travelling down the tube is reflected as a pulse of low pressure air
travelling up the tube.
(Chen, Smith and Wolf, n.d. pp2-3)
Figure 2.1 is taken from Chen, J, Smith J, Wolfe J, Open vs. Closed Pipes (Flutes vs.
Clarinets), in which some generalisations are made regarding the flute. Firstly the length of
the flute is estimated to be 0.6m and secondly it is assumed that the speed of sound travels
at 340m/s. It is observed that the red wave in figure 2.1 is only half the length of a sine
wave, therefore the longest complete sine wave the flute can produce is twice the length of
the instrument: approximately 1.2m. The equation needed to find a frequency is therefore
(340/1.2= 283.3°) 283.3Hz. This equation gives us a wave that equates to the note C#4
which (given the number of variables and generalisations made) is close enough to the
1
To illustrate this I have measured my own instruments: flute – 66cm, Clarinet – 67cm. Both measurements
were taken with the head-joint/mouthpiece pushed all the way in.
63
actual note C4 which is the lowest note of the flute. The authors have then included in their
diagram other wavelengths that can fit inside the first:
Note that we can also fit in waves that equal the length of the flute (half the
fundamental wavelength so twice the frequency of the fundamental), 2/3 the
length of the flute (one third the fundamental wavelength so three times the
frequency of the fundamental), 1/2 the length of the flute (one quarter the
wavelength so four times the frequency of the fundamental). This set of
frequencies is the (complete) harmonic series
(Chen, Smith and Wolf, n.d. p.2)
Fig.2.1 Diagram of wavelength behaviour in both an open pipe (left, representing the flute) and a closed
pipe (right, representing the clarinet) whilst performing the harmonic series
This gives us the frequencies 566.6Hz (C#5), 850Hz (G#5) and1133.2Hz (C#6) which
corresponds to the natural harmonic series which is displayed in figure 2.2 as
displayed in Chen, Smith and Wolfe. It should be noted that due to the amount of
mathematical variables mentioned earlier these calculations are nearly a semi-tone
sharp from the flute's actual sounding pitches; however, the equations give
performers an understanding of the theory behind the tube's acoustical behaviour.
The harmonic series can be represented as a multiple of the fundamental frequency;
therefore two times the fundamental frequency is the second partial, three times the
64
Fig.2.2 The natural harmonic series taken from Wolfe, J. (n.d.). Open vs Closed Pipes (Flutes vs clarinets)
available at: www.phys.unsw.edu.au/jw/flutes.v.clrinets.html.
fundamental is the third partial, and so on. To demonstrate this the following diagram is an
oscilloscope reading of the author playing the fundamental and first three partials of the
flute (track 29). Notice how the wavelengths do indeed double following the ratios described
above:
Fig.2.3 Oscilloscope reading of the author playing the fundamental (C4) and first three partials (C5, G5, C6)
on the flute, with the corresponding ratios where λ = wavelength
f (λ/1) 2f (λ/2)
3f (λ/3) 4f (λ/4)
When the above diagram is compared with the vibrations of a string the same effect can be
seen, and similar mathematics as outlined in this diagram from The Science of Musical
65
Sound by John R. Pierce (1983). The fundamental here is also twice the length of the string
in order to make a complete sine wave, hence doubling the length of the string in order to
find the fundamental pitch (2L) as we did with the example of the flute.
Fig.2.4 Ratios of a vibrating string where L = Length (of resonator), f = frequency and v = constant
velocity.
These generalisations and assumptions seem often to be used when referring to the study
of actual musical sound as defended by John R. Pierce in his book The Science of Musical
Sound:
In practice, we use the ideas of sine waves and their frequencies and
amplitudes to characterise the musical sounds, and other sounds as well. The
measurements we really make are those suitable for our purposes, and are as
accurate as they need be.
(J.R. Pierce, 1983 p.44)
66
In order to gain a practicable understanding of acoustical physics such mathematical
variables and discrepancies that may be present can be discounted so that a musician can
rely on useful approximations to build a picture of how musical sounds work.
Standing Waves in Pipes

Chen et al stated earlier that when the sound-waves of the flute, which has an open pipe,
reaches the end of the tube 'it spreads out in all directions [and] its pressure falls very
quickly to nearly atmospheric pressure'. When one end of the tube is closed, however, a
different resulting wavelength is produced and therefore a different harmonic series .This
fact is in sympathy with the impossibility of 'obtaining any sounds other than the
fundamentals determined by the construction of the instrument, and their related
harmonics as stated earlier by Bartolozzi (1982). Figure 2.5 shows how the wavelength for
an instrument with a pipe which is closed at one end is significantly longer than that of an
instrument with a pipe which is open at one end. This is due to the high pressure pulse
being reflected back up the tube as a second high pressure pulse as it reflects off the
atmospheric pressure which is called a standing wave (Chen, J, Smith J, Wolfe J, Open vs.
Closed Pipes (Flutes vs. Clarinets) n.d. p.3) producing only one quarter of a sine wave and
therefore the note produced equates to a wave that is four times the length of the tube
(0.6m times 4 = 2.4m). Using the same equation as before to find the frequency of this
wavelength we find that speed divided by wavelength (340/2.4) gives us the frequency
141.6Hz resulting in the note C#3. The lowest note on the clarinet is D3 and so this time
the result of this equation is a semi-tone flat again due to the amount of variables that have
not been taken into account for this study.
Figure 2.5 which is taken from Chen, J, Smith J, Wolfe J Clarinet Acoustics: An Introduction
demonstrates the harmonic series of the clarinet, where the wavelength is equal to the four
times the length of the tube (l), and constant velocity (v) divided by the wavelength (λ)
gives us the frequency (f). In figure 2.5 the second and fourth partial are only theoretical
67
Fig.2.5 Wavelengths within a cylinder closed at one end
on the clarinet and they equate to the wavelength pattern of the first and second partial of
the flute. The wavelength is always partially within the tube-length, this is due to the
acoustic impedance of the high pressure wave reflection produced by the closed tube. The
practical upshot of this is that the clarinet can only produce the odd numbered partials of
the harmonic series, which I have once again demonstrated by recording myself playing the
fundamental and first two partials on my own instrument (figure 2.6, track 30). The
clarinet's behaviour is different to that of the flute as the wavelength is not neatly doubling
but fits only within fractions of itself. These uneven ratios mean that not every partial is
possible, indeed the octave (for example) would be double the frequency therefore double
the wavelength yet a double wavelength does not appear in practice. The inability to
produce all of the notes in a harmonic series impacts on the type of harmonics and
therefore multiphonics the instrument can play, and therefore limiting the type of extended
technique which is available to that instrument.
68
Fig.2.6 Oscilloscope reading of the author playing the fundamental (D3) and first two partials (A4, F5) on
the clarinet, with the corresponding ratios where λ = wavelength
λ=4L
λ=4/3 L λ=4/5 L
Bore Shape
The specific acoustical behaviour of the saxophone is closely related to the closed pipe and
high impedance model seen in the case of the clarinet; however, the bore shape being
conical has a further impact on the instrument's harmonic series. The saxophone's bore
follows the shape of a 'parabolic curve' (Kool, J. 1953 p.82) as illustrated in figure 2.7.
The three types of curve obtained by intersecting cones with a plane are called conic
sections and there are three types 1: parabola, 2: circle and eclipse and 3: hyperbola, and
the curve of the saxophone according to Sax's original patent is closest to that of a
parabola. The conical nature of the saxophone's bore is relevant because it means that a
second force is acting upon the wave travelling down the tube as the wave is not only
travelling in a linear direction but also in a radial direction. This means that the sound is
beginning to spread throughout the bore in a spherical symmetry represented by the
69
Fig.2.7 Diagram of different conic sections available at
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/File:Conic_sections_with_plane.svg
equation 1/r2 'where r is the radius of the sphere because it is spread out through the area
of a sphere which is proportional to r2 ...double the distance away, the sound power is
spread over four times the area' (Wolfe, J. Pipes and Harmonics n.d. p.5). This equation
adds an extra factor to the λ=4L equation used for the clarinet and therefore it changes the
behaviour of the instrument, Wolfe states that 'the standing wave in pressure has an
envelope which is (1/r) times a sine wave with a wavelength which is 2L/n, where L is the
length of the instrument and n is an integer' (Wolfe, J. Pipes and Harmonics n.d. p.5).
Figure 2.8 (track 31) shows the third set of results collected by the author this time playing
the fundamental and the first three partials on a soprano saxophone. Here the ratio of
partials in relation to the fundamental is the same as the flute in that the frequency is
relative to the proportion of the wavelength. The radial effect of the bore is significant as it
allows the saxophone, via means of its conical shape, to play all of the partials in the
harmonic series even though it is a closed tube with high atmospheric pressure at the top
and low pressure at the bell like the clarinet.
70
Fig.2.8 Oscilloscope reading of the author playing the fundamental (A3) and first three partials (A4, E5, A6) on the
soprano saxophone, with the corresponding ratios where λ = wavelength
f (λ/1) 2f (λ/2)
3f (λ/3) 4f (λ/4)
The acoustical behaviour of the saxophone's closed pipe design - as opposed to the
clarinet's or the flute's design - account for the techniques it can produce using the
harmonic spectrum. When comparing the saxophone's multiphonic types to the clarinet's
multiphonic types it is clear that there are many more strongly oscillating multiphonic
sounds involving intervals such as minor ninths and minor twelfths as opposed to the
clarinet's wider multiphonics with less oscillation.
71
Impedance (z)
An understanding of acoustic impedance helps the performer to appreciate how the different
dimensions of their specific choice of instrument dictates the sound that will result not only
in extended technique playing but also in their overall sound and harmonic series. Pressure
acting upon a wave from the atmosphere is significant to the acoustical properties of that
wave, this is referred to as acoustic impedance (z) which is a force that is a result of the
medium through which the wave travels, as outlined by Joe Wolfe: 'acoustic impedance has
the advantage of being a physical property of the instrument alone – it can be measured (or
calculated) for the instrument without a player. It is a spectrum, because it has different
values for different frequencies – one can think of it as the acoustical response of the
instrument for all possible frequencies' (Wolfe, J. What is Acoustic Impendance and Why is it
Important? n.d.). This idea of a measurement which is taken from a medium independent of
any external factors is also stated in Arthur H. Benade's book Fundamentals of Musical
Acoustics as follows: 'The wave impedance... is a way of specifying (along with the wave
velocity) one of the attributes of the wave carrying medium itself, without reference to its
boundaries. As a matter of fact, one of the easiest ways to measure a wave impedance is to
experiment on a very extended piece of material and to conclude the measurements before
any echoes can be returned by its boundaries' (Benade, 1976 p.330). This has significance
to a performer's choice of instrument as each saxophone has slightly different bore
dimensions, thickness, material and brass composition, especially the popular handmade
Selmer Paris instruments of the pre 1970s. All of these variables have some effect on the
impedance produced in the instrument and therefore the response and behaviour of
extended techniques that can be performed.
Fig.2.9 Acoustic impedance of a theoretical cylinder which is effectively infinite in length and has no external
factors acting upon taken from Wolfe's article Pipes and Harmonics
72
Figure 2.9 shows the acoustic impedance of a theoretical cylinder which is effectively infinite
in length and has no external factors acting upon it which, according to Wolfe, is a system
regularly employed to measure the characteristics of acoustical impedance. The
measurement on the y axis of the graph measures the acoustic impedance of increasing
frequencies on the x axis and it is clear that the impedance decreases slightly the higher in
frequency the instrument plays. The unit of measurement for musical impedance is quite a
complex one:
The unit of pressure is the Pascal – one Newton per square metre. A Pascal is
a big unit for sound: an oscillation of one Pa is usually a very loud sound
indeed... Flow is measured in cubic metres per second. (A very gentle breeze
coming in your window could be 1 m3/s. But for 1 m3/s to flow down a pipe,
either the pipe must be big – think ventilation ducts – or the speed must be
high.) The units for impedance are therefore Pa.s/m3, which we call the
acoustic ohm Ω. For musical instruments, it is a rather small unit, so we use
megohms: MPa.s/m3. Finally, sound pressures have a large range. For this
and other, psychophysical reasons we use logarithmic scales for sound level
and impedance
(Wolfe, n.d.)
Figure 2.9 shows an inverse proportionality between frequency and the acoustic ohm: lower
sounds have a greater impedance than higher sounds.
Fig.2.10 acoustic impedance as measured in a cylinder plus cone, a soprano saxophone, a clarinet, a flute, and a
theoretically infinite cylinder
This information becomes more useful for an instrumentalist when applied to their own
instrument and so figure 2.10 taken from Chen, Smith and Wolfe's article Saxophone
73
Acoustics: Introducing a Compendium of Impedance and Sound Spectra shows the
behaviour of the impedance wave in instrument bores as compared to a cone and cylinder.
It is clear from the graphical representation shown in figure 2.10 that in all cases the higher
frequencies result in a levelling out of the impedance wave leaving little difference between
the previously defined maxima and minima peaks. Wolfe explains that this behaviour is to
be expected in musical instruments by observing that 'The acoustic impedance of musical
wind instruments varies spectacularly with frequency because these instruments are
designed to produce one or several frequencies only in a particular configuration' (Wolfe,
n.d.). Wolfe goes on to describe these variances by making reference to the individual
instruments' behaviour as discussed previously:
the flute is played with the embouchure hole (at least partly) open to the
atmosphere, so the pressure at the embouchure hole is very near to
atmospheric pressure. Thus the acoustic pressure (the varying part) is nearly
zero. The flow is provided by a jet of air from between the player's lips.
Oscillations of air flow in the flute can cause this jet to deflect upwards
(outside the flute) or downwards (inside) so that the acoustic flow... can be
large. Thus the flute operates at minima of Z: a small pressure and a large
flow. Most other wind instruments have a reed which is sealed by the player's
mouth and they operate at maxima of Z: the varying part of the pressure is
large, but the oscillating part of the air flow is small at the reed... In each of
the impedance curves for the flute, there are at least a few rather deep, sharp
minima, and the flute will usually play a note with a frequency near each of
those deep minima. The ease of playing and the stability of the note depend
on the depth and narrowness of the minima.
Conversely, in each of the impedance curves for the clarinet, there are at
least a few rather high, sharp maxima, and the clarinet will usually play a
note with a frequency near each of those high maxima. The ease of playing
and the stability of the note depend on the height and narrowness of the
maxima. For instance the very highest notes are hard to play, and you can
see on the spectra that at high frequency the maxima and minima are
weaker--they "help the player less". There is more to it than this, however.
For the instrument to play properly a note with frequency f, it usually needs
an extremum at f, and also extrema at 2f, 3f, 4f etc. The reason for this is
that the vibration of the air jet or reed and the sound made by the flute are
not simple sine waves. Their waves are periodic waves (that is they repeat in
time) and they contain a fundamental and a harmonic series. It is important
to the performance of wind instruments that the various minima that help
produce a particular note are in the harmonic series
(Wolfe, n.d.)
74
Here Wolfe has made reference to the importance of the harmonic series and to the
idea of each high pitch needing an extrema at 2f, 3f, 4f which explains why higher
pitches are difficult to play as the margin for error is greatly increased as the
wavelengths become shorter and yet, paradoxically maybe, this is why high pitches
are so easily manipulated due to the same phenomena. It is significant that when
preparing techniques which exploit the fundamental-and-harmonics model of the
saxophone, such as playing in the altissimo register, playing harmonics and
multiphonics, the instrument itself has an effect on the sound and this effect will
inevitably sound slightly different according to the performer's choice of equipment.
Part II: The Science of Extended Techniques

The Mouthpiece and Embouchure
It is common for saxophonists to experiment with the mouthpiece in order to change
the overall sound or tone of their instrument; mouthpiece designs are wide ranging
and varied with the most common variances being the size of the tip opening (the
distance between the tip of the mouthpiece and the reed), the length of the baffle
(how much reed is in contact with the flat surface of the mouthpiece) and the shape
of the tone chamber. In addition to changing the overall sound it is possible that a
change in mouthpiece can also alter the specific partials that appear in a multiphonic,
or change the intonation of a quarter tone, and so the performer who wishes to create
specific effects according to the score needs to be aware of these differences in order
to execute a technique according to their own interpretation.
In F. S. Wyman's study An Acoustical Study of Alto Saxophone Mouthpiece Chamber Design
(1972) the author states that 'one must keep in mind that there are certain influences on
tone quality which are not related directly to mouthpiece design. First and foremost of these
is the player's own concept of saxophone tone... The selection of a mouthpiece which has a
chamber design which will give a tone quality close to that of the player's 'ideal' is
75
important. Otherwise, the player will have to fight the mouthpiece tendencies by the use of
extreme facings, reed contours and the like. Other influences of the player on the tone
produced can be traced to differences between individuals in the shape and size of their oral
and sinus cavities. Although acoustical studies have shown that oral cavity shape have no
effect upon tone quality, many musicians still feel that the oral cavity has much to do with
the “centering” of a tone and with making various adjustments in the pitch of a tone. The
oral cavity also is an important aid in the damping necessary when playing in the second
mode of vibration' (Wyman,1972 pp.61-62). This is a curious statement as surely it can only
be the oral cavity that changes an individuals' sound and produces their 'ideal' in the way
Wyman suggests, perhaps instead of 'oral cavity' Wyman means 'tongue position' which is
usually the main factor in altering the shape of the oral cavity and therefore changes the
tone by restricting the air entering the instrument. The conclusion of Wyman's study
appears to concur with this as he states the 'control of oral cavity shape allow[s] for
difference in tone quality between performers using the same mouthpiece' (Wyman,1972
pp.61-62). Wyman indicates that the 'amount of brightness in the tone is primarily
controlled by the baffle shape. A small baffle-to-reed angle tends to promote a bright tone'
(Wyman,1972 pp.61-62) which implies that the players' choice of mouthpiece can play a
very important role in the development of their sound. Stephen Trier makes the following
remark in his article The Saxophone in the Orchestra:
Saxophones are capable of an immense range of dynamics. A large industry

has been set up to help the player achieve these extra decibels. It is not
possible to produce every type of sound from one mouthpiece and reed...
Every kind of material has been used: wood, crystal, ebonite, plastic, and a
profusion of metals and alloys. Their object has always been to enable players
to produce different qualities and quantities of sound. The saxophones are
capable of an enormous variety of timbre, but players need the help of
different kinds of reeds and mouthpieces to produce them... One other vital
factor in the player-mouthpiece equation is the control of intonation... The
player can do a great deal, but it is certain that some mouthpieces do not
match every instrument
(S. Trier, 1998).
Trier seems to be in agreement with Wyman by concluding that the saxophonist affects the
overall tone with their own physiology, yet the mouthpiece choice can greatly help or hinder
76
a player in this task. In order to highlight the connection between mouthpiece choice and
overall tone I have have recorded a Concert A4 at 440Hz on both alto and tenor saxophones
using a closed, narrow baffled mouthpiece (used for classical playing) and an open, wide
baffled mouthpiece (used for pop and jazz playing). In each example the closed mouthpiece
appears on the left and the open mouthpiece appears on the right, and the mouthpieces
can be heard on tracks 32 (Vandoren) and 33 (Freddie Gregory) of the accompanying CD.
Fig.2.11 A spectral analysis of A4 played on the alto using a Vandoren Optimum AL3 mouthpiece (left) and
a Freddie Gregory Model F6 (right).
On the left of Figure 2.11 is a graphical representation of the partials present in the note A4
(440Hz) when played on my Vandoren Optimum AL3 mouthpiece which has a close lay, and
on the right is the same note played on my Freddie Gregory Model F6 which has an open
lay. In the lower partials not much is different: the fundamental is present as are the
partials we would expect to see from the saxophone's harmonic series: 220Hz, 440Hz,
660Hz, 880Hz, 1320Hz etc. It is in the upper partials that the difference can be appreciated
as the brighter, wide baffled Freddie Gregory mouthpiece resonates with partials up to
3500Hz; whereas the Vandoren AL3 mouthpiece only has strong partials up to 2650Hz. It is
these higher partials that increase the projection and amplitude of the sound making the
tone sound 'brighter' and more penetrating. To ensure that it is the mouthpiece only that is
77
changing the sound I repeated the exercise on my tenor saxophone (tracks 34 (Selmer) and
35 (Berg Larson) of the Cd):
Fig.2.12 A spectral analysis of A4 played on the tenor using a Selmer S80 D mouthpiece (left) and a Berg
Larson grained ebonite 110 mouthpiece (right).
The partials are all present up to around 3400Hz when played on the Selmer S80
represented in the left hand graph whereas partials are being sounded as high as 4400Hz
on the right hand graph which represents the Berg Larson grained ebonite 110 mouthpiece.
This explains why saxophonists change their mouthpieces when playing different styles of
music as suggested by Stephen Trier and backed up in conversation with Rob Buckland,
giving strength to Wyman's claim that 'The selection of a mouthpiece which has a chamber
design which will give a tone quality close to that of the player's “ideal” is important giving
the saxophonist a choice and overall control over their sound' (1972, pp.61-62).
The tone chamber and lay of a mouthpiece are not the only variables when considering
tonal quality in that the reed acts as a valve for the air pressure before the air even enters
the mouthpiece itself. Benade summarises the effect of the pressure acting upon the reed in
three statements:
1. The resonance frequencies of an air column terminated by a reed are

always lowered by a reed's presence, and they are never higher than the
natural frequency with which the reed cane itself would vibrate if plucked
78
like a tuning fork. (Note: this natural frequency is not the one obtained
by blowing on an oboe or bassoon reed or on a clarinet mouthpiece; in
all these cases there is present inside the reed cavity a miniature air
column that has significant influence.)
2. Changes in the reed's natural frequency (produced for example by
changes in the way in which it is pressed onto the mouthpiece by the
player) produce small but parallel changes in the air-column modes that
lie far below the reed's natural frequency. These changes become
progressively larger for higher modes that lie nearer to the reed
frequency.
3. The reed damping produced by the player's lip serves among other
things to reduce the magnitude of the changes described in statements
1 and 2, although they are still musically important.
(1972, pp.61-62)
Statement 1 is especially important as it has the most immediate effect; the reed cavity
produces a second air column which works upon the bore of the instrument. This explains
why the choice of reed in combination with a suitable lay/chamber design affects the sound
of the instrument as illustrated above. Benade has also included a diagram of how the flow
through the reed-valve system is affected by the pressure across the reed, up to the point
the reed closes as shown in figure 2.13. The diagram illustrates a 'sweet spot' where the
flow through the reed is facilitated by the pressures of the embouchure acting upon it. This
is concurrent with Bernoulli's principle which states that the velocity of a compressible liquid
or gas will increase when there is a drop in pressure surrounding it; this principle will be
investigated in more detail a little later in this chapter. In the context of saxophone playing
the pressure is the highest around the embouchure and low either side of the embouchure
thus resulting in a higher velocity as the air passes through the embouchure and into the
instrument. A similar graph can be found on the web page Saxophone Acoustics: An
Introduction by Joe Wolfe where he demonstrates the effect of air flow versus pressure up
until the reed closes (figure 2.14, which is very similar to Benade's illustration) and then
goes on to show how this effect varies across differing dynamics in figure 2.15.
79
Fig.2.13 Diagram representing the flow of pressure across a reed.
Fig.2.14 Graph representing the relationship between air flow and mouth pressure
Each diagram shows how this sweet spot (the operating point Wolfe refers to) lies within a
certain range of pressure depending on the amplitude at which it is being sounded. This
factor can be altered by increasing the distance between the reed and the mouthpiece (the
lay) and also by varying the thickness of the reed itself. It is for these reasons that a
performer's choice of equipment needs to be a balance between the tone desired, the
dynamic level needed and the harmonics that are to be stimulated, and these factors will
inevitably affect a range of extended techniques depending on this balance.
80
Fig.2.15 Graphs representing the relationship between air flow and mouth pressure at differing dynamic levels
Multiphonics
Multiphonics are one of the main instances of acoustic phenomena directly affecting sound
production for woodwind players. Multiphonics are caused by a mixture of fingerings, tongue
position, embouchure alteration and air stream velocity resulting in multiple simultaneous
sounds. The result of these external manipulations is the sounding of two or more
discernible pitches at the same time from a single resonator. The conclusion of John Backus'
paper Multiphonic Tones in the Woodwind Instruments (1977) claims that multiphonics are
'heard as perhaps a tone with either two or more simultaneous and distinct pitches, or as a
tone with a rough and “beating” quality. They are produced by the simultaneous vibration of
the air column at two frequencies that are not harmonically related' (1977, p.599). The
'beating' quality that Backus refers to here is what Weiss & Netti refer to as 'strong
oscillation' (Weiss & Nettis, 2010), which in turn perhaps suggests that the seemingly non-
specific nature of pitch production produced by multiphonic fingerings needs to be controlled
through tongue and larynx manipulation in order to accurately represent the notated music.
Heterodyne Components
Arthur H. Benade explains how this random element of frequency production within
multiphonics can be explained by Heterodyne components which are closely related to
beating patterns as they relate to the behaviour of two or more normal sine waves (also
called sinusoidal components) which are harmonically close together. This is not limited to
sounds produced from a single resonator and could equally be worked out for two different
81
instruments, or the addition of the voice to the instrument's sound. John Backus'
Multiphonics in the Woodwind Instruments (USA, 1978) describes simple relationships
between the multiphonic sinusoidal components (A+B) and the heterodyne components
(which he defines as B-A and B+A) to create the clarinet multiphonics shown in figure 2.16.
Both Backus' article and his main source of reference Bruno Bartolozzi's New Sounds for
Woodwind (1982) are relatively old texts and thus only consider the orchestral woodwind
instruments, excluding the saxophone from their studies. However, I have included an
example of Backus' clarinet experiments due to the shared reed-valve system the
instruments have and the similar closed tube wavelength behaviours.
Fig.2.16 Heterodyne components in clarinet multiphonics taken from Backus (1978)
The mixture of sinosoidal and heterodyne components creates the notes we hear
within the multiphonic. However, multiphonics on the saxophone tend to be much
more strident and complex than the clarinet's multiphonics including intervals of
octave, ninths, and twelfths,meaning that there must be other components within a
single multiphonic.
Benade's Fundamentals of Musical Acoustics (1976) expands the heterodyne components
through the table of relationships as shown in table 6. These equations suggest that there
are more patterns to the sounds that we hear from the multiphonic (the heterodyne
components) in relation to the chief energy sources of P and Q (the sinusoid components)
than Backus suggests. In order to understand the behaviour of multiphonics I have recorded
Kientzy multiphonic number 55 on my soprano saxophone (track 36) and analysed it using
82
the SPEAR (Sinusoidal Partial Editing Analysis and Resynthesis) software which is shown in
figure 2.17.
Table 6: Benade's table of simple Heterodyne relationships
Original Simplest Heterodyne Next-Appearing

Components Components Heterodyne Components
P (2P) (3P)
(2P+Q), (2P-Q)
(P+Q), (P-Q)
Q (2Q) (2Q+P), (2Q-P)

(3Q)
In the following analysis the vertical y axis represents the frequency in Hz and the horizontal
x axis represents time. There are eight loose groupings of frequencies; the main frequencies
in each group are shown in table 7.
Fig.2.17 SPEAR analysis of Kientzy multiphonic number 55 played on the soprano saxophone
In order to ascertain whether or not these audible frequencies are a result of heterodyne
components I have inserted the equations from table 6 (represented in italics) in order to
83
outline the numerical relationships. Using these relationships we can assume that the
sinusoid components are E4 (P=330 Hz) and F5 (Q=700 Hz). Kientzy indicates in his book
on multiphonics that the main audible sounds in this multiphonic
Table 7: Banade's table of Heterodyne relationships with values taken from Kientzy multiphonic number 90.
All figures are in Hz
Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group Group Group 7 Group
5 6 8
265 655 (2P) 980 (3P) 1365 1745 2065 2296 (3Q) 2845
330 (P) 700 1035 (P+Q) 1418 (2P+Q) 2515
380 760 (Q) 1085 1480 (2Q+P)
435 (P-Q) 1148 (2Q-P)
1203 (2P-Q)
(Kientzy number 90) is E5 (659 Hz) not E4. This suggests that the bottom note of this dyad
multiphonic is a heterodyne component of 2P rather than a sinusoid component as Kientzy
implies. Listening to track 36 there is indeed a lower component audible outside of this dyad
which complies with these rules.
Using the same formulas on Kientzy multiphonic 46 (track 37) for soprano the frequencies
can once again be analysed as shown in table 8.
Table 8: Banade's table of Heterodyne relationships with values taken from Kientzy multiphonic number 90.
All figures are in Hz
Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 Group 6 Group 7 Group 8
332 645 (Q-P) 980 1359 (Q) 1679 2058 (P+Q) 2391 2769 (2Q)
384 701 (P) 1029 1415 (2P) 1733 2117 2434 3471
1080
It is interesting how the third note of the multiphonic (C7 slightly flattened) is actually the
result of the heterodyne component of P+Q. From a practical point of view this suggests
that the simplest heterodyne components (P, Q, and P+Q) are the easiest to manipulate
when performing multiphonics as each of these notes can be isolated by pitching them using
the tongue and larynx.
84
Fig.2.18 SPEAR analysis of Kientzy multiphonic number 46 played on the soprano saxophone
Some of the heterodyne components in this example are sonically very close to one another
as shown in table 8; for example Q-P at 645hz equates to a flattened E5 whilst P itself at
701Hz is F5. Also Q at 1359Hz and 2P at 1415Hz both equate to the note F6. These very
close frequencies may well explain the dissonance and strong oscillation within these
multiphonics created by beating patterns that are generated from sounds that are so close
to each other.
It is important for a performer to have an understanding of these relationships when
performing multiphonics as it is worth being aware of exactly which partials are present in
the sound and therefore which partials need to be suppressed using the tongue and larynx
in order to accurately realise the score. It is also possible to emphasise certain pitches
within the multiphonic using the same manipulation and this is often useful to highlight pitch
relations that are implicit within the composition according to a performer's individual
interpretation of these relationships.
85
Microtones
Composers often use microtonal intervals in their music to alter and expand/contract the
sounds they wish to hear. A performer has a number of different fingerings available to
them which on paper seem to achieve the same quarter or eighth tone but in practice these
fingerings often result in slightly different tunings according to the fingering chosen. An
understanding of how microtonal fingerings work and how they alter the sound can help a
performer to choose the appropriate fingerings based upon the effect they wish to create
and the musical context of these micro-intervals.
Due to its conical shaped bore the saxophone employs a system of progressively larger key
cups to cover the tone holes, unlike the clarinet, flute or bassoon whose cylindrical shape
allows the tone holes (which are all of a uniform size) to be covered directly with the
fingers. The saxophonist relies on remotely controlled key cups for nearly every note and
this feature of the instrument's design is of huge importance when it comes to playing
microtones as saxophonists cannot half-cover tone holes with any degree of accuracy. Half-
opening keys can sometimes be achieved but again, due to the remote controlled
articulation of the saxophone certain keys tend to control other keys either further up
and/or down the instrument's bore. For example one cannot half close the B key without the
'bis' key (controlling Bb) also being affected, and any key depressed by the right hand will
result in the G# key being precluded from opening due to the articulated G# mechanism.
This latter example actually denies the saxophone the ability of playing G quarter tone sharp
as the required pad is permanently closed by the right hand, which at the same time is the
only hand available to alter the note; I will suggest a solution to this problem later in this
section.
Fork Fingerings
Benade outlines a fork fingering as 'one in which the regularity of the open-hole lattice is
interrupted by closing one or more of its holes. A typical fork fingering occurs when one
attempts to flatten a note a semitone by closing the second hole down in what had
86
originally been a series of open holes' (A. Benade 1976 p.451). Figure 2.19 is taken from
Benade's book and outlines the behaviour of this 'open-hole lattice' when a fork fingering is
introduced into it. The three examples depicted show
Fig.2.19 Diagram showing Benade's 'open-hole lattice'
the difference of spacing (2S) between a normal fingering, a single fork fingering, and a
double fork fingering. The value 2S clearly increases with the addition of the forked
fingering therefore the pitch drops due to the fact that the air travels slightly further in each
case. Ronald Caravan observes:
the result is that the quarter-tone fingerings are detected as producing a

'darker' or 'duller' tone quality. (This can be compared to the variations in tone
color due to cross fingerings which must be used to play the chromatic scale
on earlier forms of woodwind instruments.) (Caravan, 1974).
Figure 2.20 shows an example of this from the fingering chart for a recorder: an early
instrument that relies wholly on fork fingerings to play the chromatic scale.
Notice how the treble recorder's A (as depicted by the lower notes on the stave) can only
move to Bb due to a double fork fingering lengthening the space between the holes (2S)
and therefore flattening the note above (B) by half a step (Bb).
87
Fig.2.20 Fingering chart showing a two-finger fork on the recorder taken from
http://www.wfg.woodwind.org/recorder/rec_bas_1.html
The principle of flattening a pitch using forked fingering is also common to the saxophone
and is the basis of playing the quarter tone scale. Figure 2.21 shows a quarter tone scale
compiled by renowned soloist and current professor at the Paris Conservatoire Claude
Delangle, and is taken from the chapter The Contemporary Saxophone in The Cambridge
Companion to the Saxophone (1998). The first note on the chart (D quarter tone flat) is an
example of a fork fingering, where the pads 123-456 are closed but the Bb key is also
depressed. This is similar to the fingering for low Bb; however, key 7 has been missed out
thus creating a two-finger fork as the Bb key closes both low B and Bb pads thus flattening
the D by a quarter tone. This pattern continues for most fingerings; however, it should be
noted that some fingerings on the chart mask this fact graphically but in practice the fork
fingering is still in place, for example the D quarter tone sharp (the second fingering on the
chart) where keys 123-456 are again depressed with the addition of Eb and 7 which are
depressed by the same finger. This results in the opening of the Eb key which is between
keys 6 and 7 creating a one finger fork with 2S being the distance between key 6 and 7 and
thus flattening the note E. The fingering for the note Ab (or G#) is problematic, however, as
it involves keys 123 and the addition of the special G# key leaving only keys 456 available
in the right hand to create a forked fingering. The problem here is that the saxophone's
articulated G# mechanism precludes a fork from being produced as any key that is
depressed be it 4, 5 or 6 automatically closes the G# pad due to a bridging mechanism.
88
Fig.2.21 Quarter-tone fingering chart, taken from Delangle and Michat (1998)
Figure 2.22 (a) shows the bridging mechanism at its resting position; key 4 is open and the
bridge is open allowing the G# pad (which is closed) room to open. Figure 2.22 (b) shows
the G# pad in its open position when the G# key is depressed, and figure 2.22 (c) shows
the bridging mechanism automatically closing when key 4 is depressed (this also happens
when key 5 or 6 are depressed). Indeed in Ronald Caravan's Fingering chart included in his
study he simply writes N/A each time G quarter tone sharp is mentioned, and also the
online fingering guide (www.wfg.woodwind.org) also has no solution as shown in figures
2.23 and 2.24. The solution for playing the note G quarter tone sharp is suggested by
Delangle in his fingering chart depicted in figure 2.21 as half closing the G# key denoted by
the addition of the note 'add ½ G#'. The technique of half-closing has also been discussed
in reference to Weiss & Netti's book in which it is suggested that in order to pitch a G
89
quarter tone sharp the performer must 'finger a G# and lay the fingernail of the index finger
of the right hand on the edge of the tone hole of the F or F# key and closing it until it
touches the fingernail.
Fig.2.22(a) G# bridge mechanism, Fig.2.22(b) G# bridge mechanism,

G# key not depressed, right hand not depressed G# key depressed, right hand not depressed
Fig.2.22(c) G# bridge mechanism, Fig.2.22(d) altered G# bridge mechanism,

G# key depressed, right hand depressed G# key depressed, right hand depressed
This fingering with half key is complicated, but it is, in fact, a fingering' (Weiss & Netti, 2010
p.15). This is particularly difficult to judge in quick passages as the task of half depressing a
key is, as Weiss & Netti have stated, so complicated as to be impractical. Another solution is
printed in the second movement of Denisov's Sonata for Alto Saxophone and Piano (1973)
where in the second movement Jean-Marie Londeix (whom the piece is dedicated to)
suggests the flattening of the note G# is achieved not by half opening the pad but by
releasing the pressure of the embouchure through the instruction 'lâcher les lévres' and an
illustration for the technique is included. In the case of this movement and its slow tempo
this technique can be successfully used, but in quick passages there can be no real accuracy
when using this technique.
90
Fig.2.23 Fingering chart taken from Caravan (1974)
Fig.2.24 Fingering chart taken from http://www.wfg.woodwind.org
Fig.2.25(a) Indication and symbol for the release of lip pressure to play G quarter tone sharp
Fig.2.26(b) Denisov's Sonata for Alto Saxophone and Piano (1973), movement II, line 4
The most successful method I have come across was told to me by the German improviser
Frank Gratkowski who pointed out that the only key on the right hand that is not used in
conjunction with the left hand during normal playing is key 6, and so the mechanism which
links the other keys and therefore the bridging mechanism with key 6 can be altered so the
fingering 123-6 (the same fingering as a normal F# on the flute) results in the bridging
mechanism only being closed half-way. The addition of the G# to this fingering will
therefore open the G# pad half-way as Delangle suggests and will produce the note G
quarter tone sharp as shown in figure 2.22(d). This method solves the problem of quick
passages as it gives the saxophonist a definite fingering for the note rather than half-closing
pads or altering the embouchure (track 38). In order to demonstrate the difference between
91
the two different methods of producing the note G quartertone sharp, I have recorded the
gesture shown in figure 2.26(b) using both the 'lâcher les lévres' technique (track 39) and
the same gesture using this mechanical alteration (track 40).
The different methods of achieving microtones on the saxophone, be it half opening keys or
the combinations of one and two fingered forks in the open hole lattice, offer the performer
a great deal of choice as to which combination of production methods will suit an individual
composition. It is therefore up to the performer to choose which combinations are best
based on their own understanding of the work and the relationships of pitch, interval,
timbre and rhythm they wish to emphasise.
Part III: Understanding the Importance of Physiology

It has been mentioned in the previous sections that the performer can manipulate extended
techniques such as microtones, multiphonics, harmonics and the altissimo register through
use of the tongue, larynx and oral cavity. These physiological techniques are vital for the
production and manipulation of these sounds and without them the choices relating to
interpretation and realising the score accurately is impossible as not all techniques behave
in ways that are written down in the music. It is therefore the performer's role to use these
techniques expressively by considering the various incarnations a multiphonic or microtone
can take and choosing the method of manipulation that serves their interpretation the
closest. Alongside the single valve function of the reed/mouthpiece combination there are
other aspects that affect the workings of the air column, the most important of these being
the physiology of the performer and how the performer's understanding of the vocal tract
resonance; larynx and tongue position affect how the harmonics of the saxophone can be
manipulated when, for example, playing in the altissimo register. It is only through an
understanding of how physical manipulations of one's body alters the sound of the
saxophone that any attempt at altissimo playing and techniques such as spectral sweeps,
portamento or playing individual partials of a multiphonic can be made at all successful.
92
Many players have reported anecdotally how tongue and throat positions are important for
sounding extended techniques but it is not generally understood by performers what is
happening when we play or how these manipulations help the performer achieve their
interpretative goals.
Vocal Tract Influence

In an experiment which measures the resonances within the player's vocal tract Chen,
Smith and Wolfe note that 'depending on the shape of the mouth and tongue, vibrations in
the air in the vocal tract can be enhanced or inhibited at different frequencies. At the
frequency of a resonance, a large sound pressure is produced' (Chen, Smith, Wolfe, n.d.).
This suggests that the resonance within the vocal tract is significant in producing a strong
sound on the instrument. It is also noted that 'In the high ('altissimo') range, the
professional players in this study all consistently tuned a strong resonance of the vocal tract
to a frequency slightly above that of the note to be played' and also that 'none of the
amateurs in this study tuned the vocal tract and none of them could play in this altissimo
range' (Chen, Smith, Wolfe, n.d). These statements indicate that the tuning of the vocal
tract to a similar resonant frequency to the note required when using harmonics is
imperative to their production. Figure 2.27 is taken from Chen, Smith and Wolfe's paper
entitled Experienced Saxophonists Learn to Tune Their Vocal Tracts (n.d.) and shows the
position of performer's vocal tracts relative to the pitch they are attempting to play. Both
graphs clearly show that a vocal tract resonance which is close to the desired pitch is
93
Fig.2.27 Graph indicating the relationship between vocal tract resonance with resulting impedance and frequency
played
important in the normal register but is vital when playing in the altissimo register. In
another experiment Scavone et al recorded the sound pressure levels (SPL) to indicate the
vocal tract influence of four multiphonics as shown in figure 2.28. The spectral densities of
these multiphonics were then recorded from two different players; subjects B and D. Figure
2.29 shows those results with subject B at the top and subject D underneath.
Fig.2.28 The four multiphonics used in Scavone et al's experiment to measure sound pressure levels
94
Fig.2.29 Graphs indicating the sound pressure levels measured for each multiphonic by subject B (top) and subject
D (bottom)
The findings from this experiment states that:
Multiphonics involve oscillations of the reed based on two inharmonic

downstream air column resonance frequencies and their intermodulation
components. Two relatively easy and two more difficult multiphonics were
chosen for analysis with respect to potential vocal-tract influence. The four
multiphonic fingerings and their approximate sounding notes are illustrated in
Fig.[2.28]. Figure [2.29] shows the SPL ratios for four different multiphonics,
as played by Subjects B and D. The sounds produced by the two subjects
differed significantly. From the plots, there are more spectral components
evident in the sounds of Subject D. We expect that a player can influence the
sound quality of a multiphonic by aligning an upstream resonance with one or
more components. For example, both subjects appear to reinforce a group of
partials in the range 875–1075 Hz for the last multiphonic. SPL ratio levels for
95
Subject D were, across all tasks, generally higher than those of Subject B. This
suggests that Subject D makes use of stronger upstream resonances, which
likely explains both the higher ratios for this task, as well as the greater
spectral density of the multiphonic sounds
(Scavone, Lefebvre, da Silva, 2008, p.2397).
It is interesting that two players should make such different sounds when performing
multiphonics; however, it is not too surprising taking into account the myriad of variables in
vocal tract, tongue, and larynx positions. The way these multiphonics are played and how
those variables are manipulated are usually a combination of experience, muscle-memory
(often referred to as 'feel') and listening to the resultant sounds. As a demonstration I have
recorded the same multiphonics to see how my results differ from subject B and D, and if
my spectral sounds agree with either of them. It is conclusive from the SPEAR analysis in
figure 2.30 (track 41) that my playing is similar to that of subject B in its spectral density. I
am not equipped to measure the sound pressure levels involved in vocal tract manipulation;
however, we may assume from Scavone, Lefebrve and da Silva's evidence that the sound
pressure level in the vocal tract affects the spectral density of the overall sound. In order to
test the importance of sound pressure levels on the air stream I decided to repeat the
experiment myself but using my open lay mouthpiece (figure 2.31, track 42) and as we
have already seen this mouthpiece can alter the harmonic density of the overall sound and
thus alter the tone of the instrument. I found that my results this time were largely the
same as they were the first time and there was little change to the spectrum. In listening to
the recordings of these two examples the listener can discern some difference in timbre
between the two mouthpieces, showing the effect of the chamber design but no real
difference in spectral density. These findings agree with Scavone, Lefebrve and da Silva's
conclusion that it is the instrumentalist and the sound pressure level present in their vocal
tract that significantly affects the overall sound of these multiphonics to the point that
different notes are produced, not differences in equipment or setup. Another useful
conclusion drawn from this paper is an indication of the SPL of a technique the authors call
'bugling' and to which I have already referred as playing the harmonic series or a 'spectral
96
sweep' when done in one continuous gesture. Figure 2.32 outlines a proportional increase
between the SPL and each successively high partial. This result suggests a direct link
between the SPL of the vocal tract and playing in the higher registers agreeing with Chen,
Smith and Wolfe's data.
Fig.2.30 SPEAR analysis of the author playing the multiphonics in Scavone et al's experiment on the closed
Vandoren Optimum AL3 mouthpiece
97
Fig.2.31 SPEAR analysis of the author playing the multiphonics in Scavone et al's experiment on the open Freddie
Gregory Model F6 mouthpiece
98
Fig.2.32 Graph indicating a proportional link between higher frequencies and higher sound pressure levels (SPL)
It can therefore be concluded that in order to get techniques which involve utilisation of the
harmonics to sound at all, the performer needs to understand this vital relationship between
the vocal tract, tongue position and air column. This is also true of the manipulation of
extended techniques as the player can elect to emphasise certain notes of a multiphonic, or
begin and end a spectral sweep on certain partials and it is only through this understanding
of physical manipulation that these nuances can be achieved.
99
The Effect of the Larynx
It has been demonstrated how sound pressure levels caused by the standing waves inside
the cone of the saxophone are important to the sound, and so it is necessary to understand
the role of the larynx which, in addition to the embouchure, works in tandem with the reed
system to create a valve that the air passes through before it reaches the mouthpiece. The
larynx is of course especially important when using the technique of singing and playing
simultaneously as this cartilagenous structure deep within the throat is the home of the
vocal folds and functions to open and close the aperture between them to regulate air from
the lungs when forming speech and singing. The larynx has become key to certain
saxophonist's technique. Players like John Harle are beginning to write about these issues,
but saxophonists mainly refer to high pressure air through the larynx as 'opening up the
throat' which implies that a certain amount of muscle memory is employed in order to
sound multiphonics, harmonics and spectral sweeps.
In the book Singing: The Physical Nature of the Vocal Organ (1976) Husler & Rodd-Marling
describe the vocal folds as follows: 'Two muscular folds covered by an elastic membrane are
placed within the cartilaginous framework shown in figure [2.33]. It is their vibratory action
which, by turning the outflowing breath into sound, is most directly responsible for the
production of voice' (Husler, Rodd-Marling, 1976 p.17). Arthur Benade refers to the larynx
as 'A Self-sustaining oscillatory flow controller' (Benade, 1976 p.363) and goes on to explain
that 'the [vocal] cords are given a shape and spacing that permits the aerodynamic forces
which arise from the air flowing between them into oscillation. However, the speed of the
airflow only slightly influences the frequency of this oscillation; the predominant control
comes from the mass of the vocal cords and the muscle tension set up in them' (Benade,
1976 p.363). Benade goes on to explain the function of the larynx and how it controls the
air flowing through it without interrupting the oscillatory function of the vocal cords using
the following statements:
100
1.Fluids (including air) tend to flow from regions of high pressure towards regions
where the pressure is low.
2. As a consequence of the influence of pressure on fluid flow, we recognise that

if we see an increasing flow velocity of a fluid as it moves from one point to
another in its travels, we can deduce that the pressure at a high-velocity spot
must be lower than at the low-velocity point from which the fluid came. One
cannot speed anything up without arranging to have an excess of force acting
behind it.
3. When a fluid flows steadily and continuously in a long duct, we expect the
velocity of flow to be higher in any narrow parts of the duct than in the wider
parts.
4. A joint implication of statements 2 and 3 is that we should expect the
fluid pressure in the narrow parts of a long duct to be lower than it is in the
broader parts.
(Benade 1976, p.363-364)
This is of course continuously making reference to Bernoulli's principle as outlined in the
embouchure section of this chapter; however, when applied to the larynx a fifth statement
also applies:
5. The presence of viscous friction that is normally found in a fluid and

between the fluid and its containing walls does not change the qualitative
correctness of statements 1 through 4. However, it leads to a reduction in the
total amount of fluid that passes through the system per second under the
influence of a given driving pressure of the source.
(Benade 1976, p.363-364)
Fig.2.33 Diagram of the larynx taken from Husler & Rodd-Marling (1976)
101
This statement reinforces Benade's summarisation of the larynx as being a 'flow controller'
above all else and also explains how the quality of sound produced is not affected by volume
of air passing through the system. Figure 2.34 shows an analogy for this system with
M=mass acting as a larynx controlling the pressures and velocities within the air stream.
Fig.2.34 Diagram showing 'a mechanical analog of the larynx' taken from Benade (1976)
The idea behind this analogy of the larynx is that it displays Bernoulli's principle in that the
air from the lungs marked A and the air marked C are at low pressure as compared with the
air marked B, which is under high pressure from the mass marked M. In accordance with
Bernouilli's principle the velocity of the airflow will increase as it moves from high to low
pressure and therefore the velocity of C is greater than that of A. In saxophone playing, the
mass marked M can represent the larynx, the tongue, or a mixture of the two.
102
There have been a number of studies which record the effect of the larynx on woodwind
playing usually using endoscopy and/or videofluoroscopy to record the positions of the
player's larynx whilst producing sounds on their instrument. In an article by Matthias
Weikaert and Josef Schlömicher-Thier the authors explain that the:
In singing the tone is produced in the larynx through vibrations of the vocal
folds. These vibrations create the primary laryngeal sound (voice source
signal) using subglottal pressure (during expiration) and intrinsic vocal fold
muscles and other tissues. This primary laryngeal sound is then modulated by
the resonator. The principles of breath support are similar for singing and
playing wind instruments. However, in comparison with a singer, the wind
instrumentalist needs greater breathing pressure for both the single reed
instruments (I.e. the clarinet and saxophone) and especially for the double
reed instruments (such as the bassoon and oboe)
(Weikert, Schlömicher-Thier, 1999 p.265).
This study along with a second study entitled Videofluoroscopic and Laryngoscopic
Evaluation of the Upper Airway and Larynx of Professional Bassoon Players by Kahane et al
outlines data that shows minor alterations in the shape of the larynx aperture. However,
these results serve only to show minor adjustments when playing simple musical exercises
such as crescendo/diminuendo, differing amplitudes and articulations on the tune
'Scarborough Fair'. Below is an illustration from the article by Kahane et al showing the
differences in laryngeal positions in a bassoon player whilst producing vibrato.
Fig.2.35 Endoscope of a bassoonist producing vibrato
103
It is clear from this illustration that the larynx does indeed move to regulate air flow as the
aperture between the vocal folds clearly changes from picture 1-8. Weikert and
Schlömicher-Thier's article also include endoscopic pictures with an added illustration of
positions:
Fig.2.36 Endoscope plus illustration of a saxophone player's larynx during inspiration
The above illustration shows an open larynx during inspiration as one would expect, but the
following illustrations show little difference in larynx position:
Fig.2.37 Endoscope plus illustrations of a saxophone player's larynx whilst playing forte high (top), forte glissando
to piano (middle) and forte low (bottom)
104
It is of significance that the larynx is much more open when producing higher tones (806Hz)
than it is when playing low notes (493Hz). This is due to the sound pressure level produced
when tuning the vocal tract for harmonics playing.
Benade's description of the larynx mentions that 'the [vocal] cords are given a shape and
spacing that permits the aerodynamic forces which arise from the air flowing between them
into oscillation. However, the speed of the airflow only slightly influences the frequency of
this oscillation; the predominant control comes from the mass of the vocal cords and the
muscle tension set up in them.' (Benade, 1976 p.363). It is because of this fact that the
saxophonist can reSonata the vocal cord at the same time as playing normally on the
saxophone, singing whilst they play or 'growling' as it sometimes referred to. Ronald
105
Caravan refers to this technique in his thesis Extensions of Technique for Clarinet and
Saxophone (1974) by introducing various ways the instruments can produce multiple
sonorities:
'Aside from equipment modification, there appears to be three ways of

achieving multiple sounds with the clarinet or the saxophone. First, there is the
simultaneous combination of single tones and vocal sounds. A second way
involves the use of fingerings which would normally result in single tones but
calls upon the performer to make such distortions in his tone production that
multiple sounds result. The third method involves the use of special fingering
combinations which enhance the possibility of multiphonic production
themselves.'
(R. Caravan, 1974 p.1).
Singing and playing works through the use of the larynx as a secondary resonator to the
saxophone's reed and in this way creates multiple sonorities from the instrument. This
technique does not work on the same principle as multiphonics which one could define
further as multiple sonorities from a single resonator, and the two techniques are used in
their own rights even though they result in similar heterodyne components which make up
the sound.
The Importance of Tongue Position

As has been mentioned in preceding sections, one of the most important principles in
airstream manipulation is Bernouilli's principle. I have described this principle in relation to
the reed and mouthpiece combining to create a valve through which the air is forced at high
pressure thus increasing its velocity (see figure 2.34). This effect can also be achieved
before the air hits the reed and mouthpiece set-up by altering the proximity of the tongue
towards either the hard or soft palate, creating a similar valve system which forces air from
low to high pressure thus increasing its velocity. It is this placement of the tongue that is
vital to producing harmonics, playing in the altissimo register, isolating single sounds within
a multiphonic and blending other pitches in and out of a multiphonic accordingly. Walter
Edward Carr explains the relationship between the aperture opening of the throat (larynx)
and the position of the tongue whilst playing harmonics on the saxophone: 'The saxophone
group raised the tongue to play the middle and high register harmonics and sharply dropped
106
the tongue to produce the extreme harmonic tone... The saxophone group had a dramatic
increase in throat aperture when executing the extreme harmonic tone' (Carr, 1974). We
expect to see an open larynx and therefore increased volume of air for the harmonics but
the drop in tongue position is a surprise as it does not comply with Bernouilli's principle.
This highlights a flaw within Carr's methodology as indeed the throat aperture may increase
to allow a great volume of air through, but there is no mention here of the tongue and its
proximity to the soft palate. This is borne out in Carr's own background research where he
states that a videoflureographic study of trumpet players by Amstutz in 1970 concluded that
'The tongue arched as the pitch ascended, creating a smaller aperture between the tongue
and palate.' However, Carr's data appears to contradict this conclusion as can be seen from
the following table:
Fig.2.38 Table taken from W.E. Carr (1974) outlining tongue proximity in mm to the roof of the mouth when
playing in different registers of the woodwinds
In the case of each woodwind instrument the tongue position (measured as the gap
between the tongue and the palate) appears to increase to produce the extreme register
whilst playing harmonics. Eugene Rousseau presents a reason for this increase by observing
that 'in order to have the finer airstream required to emit the high tones successfully, even
fluoroscopic studies disprove the notion that the throat must be open. Thus, the concept of
mouthpiece pitches is virtually indispensable, since the player can relate the feeling of
107
embouchure and air to a real pitch level on the mouthpiece' (E. Rousseau, 1978 p.69).
Rousseau's main method for the production of the high tone is to begin with a specific pitch
produced from the mouthpiece alone, and to use this as a reference point to manipulate the
extreme harmonics. Rousseau goes on to describe his notion of relating a 'feeling' to the
manipulation of the throat and tongue positions:
'When the above-normal tones are played, a proportionally smaller quantity of

air is used as the frequency of vibration increases. In other words, as one plays
higher the airstream becomes increasingly smaller. This phenomenon accounts
for the unusual feeling inside the mouth that the performer experiences when
first playing high tones. It has often been described as an “open throat”, an
unfortunate term for more than one reason. In the first place, ambiguity often
takes place in the mind of a saxophonist, or any wind player for that matter, who,
for the first time is told to keep an “open throat'. What is being referred to is the
inside of the mouth and throat, and its shape whilst playing, although it is
impossible to see any of these shapes and functions! Even in recent studies using
the technique of fluoroscopy, the consideration of tongue position, throat
opening, etc. -- while they may ostensibly be observed and estimated – must, in
the final analysis, be translated into a language that will produce a meaningful
result'
(E. Rousseau, 1978 p.69)
Relating harmonics to a specific 'feeling' is echoed in Marcus Weiss and Giorgio Netti's much
more recent book: 'A prerequisite for playing harmonics is a flexible embouchure and a good
ear. While playing an overtone series on a fundamental starting from the bottom, something
happens in the throat area that is very similar to singing. The higher the tone played, the
narrower the feeling in the throat and thus, the higher the “seat” of the tone in the head,
also in the nose. Just as in singing, one must search for this “positioning” of the throat and
head resonance in saxophone playing' (Weiss & Netti, 2010 p.171). Weiss & Netti refer to
this 'feeling' as 'physical-acoustic memory' and suggest it is similar to the method used by
singers to develop their highest tones. This importance of throat position in singing in order
to aid Weiss & Netti's idea of physical-acoustic memory is often taught and thought about as
vowel shapes. Vowel shapes, and their importance to the oral cavity, are discussed in Husler
and Rodd-Marling's book on singing (all terms relate to parts of the larynx):
The vowel sound 'oo'

This vowel is a 'throat opener'. Forming it, directly exercises certain muscles
from the muscular net in which the larynx is suspended... The vowel sound oo
108
exercises the principle to which the term 'covering' has been given; the voice
acquires a 'head tone' quality.
The vowel sound 'ee'
Practising this vowel sound exercises the stretchers (Crico-thyroid and Posticus)
and the Closers (lateralis and transversus). The Tensors (the entire vocalis
system) are slightly, possibly wholly relaxed... If properly handled it is a useful
vowel for finding and strengthening the falsetto...
The vowel sound 'ah'

This vowel sound belongs to the Tensors i.e., the vocal lips themselves (vocalis
system). It serves to rouse the main muscular body of the vocal folds as well as
their marginal muscle-fibres
(F. Husler and Y. Rodd-Marling, 1976 p.98)
This final point serves to explain why the 'ah' vowel sound, often described as an 'open
throat' position as mentioned in Rousseau (1987), is useful in good tone production. The
engagement of the whole vocal fold system helps the saxophonist to develop a strong tone;
however, with different vowels come from differing tongue positions as can be seen from the
following diagram taken from The Science of Musical Sound (1983) by John R. Pierce:
Fig.2.39 Diagram of tongue positions when pronouncing different vowel shapes
Here the tongue is low in the mouth with the vowels 'Had' and 'Hawed' allowing the vocal
folds to resonate fully on the 'ah' vowel. Other vowels, especially 'Heed' and 'Hid' bring the
tongue forward and high in the mouth, facilitating a higher velocity in the air stream which
is consistent with Bernouilli's principle. These are the vowel shapes a saxophonist uses in
order to place the tongue in the correct position to play the harmonic series. Vowel shapes
109
are also very useful when playing individual partials within a multiphonic as each position
roughly relates to a specific partial in the harmonic series. In order to demonstrate this I
have recorded a complete harmonic series on soprano saxophone and I have specified a
vowel shape for the fundamental and each subsequent partial. Without the benefit of x-ray
or videofluorographic technology I can only use the 'feeling' of each vowel shape as my
point of reference, and indeed other players' perception of these shapes could well differ
from my own. I have recorded these tongue positions starting on a written Bb3 on the
soprano saxophone (track 43).
Table 9: Diagram of the harmonic series played on the soprano saxophone and the corresponding tongue positions
Fundamental
First partial
110
Second partial
Third partial
Fourth partial
111
Fifth partial
Sixth partial
The difference between the fifth and sixth partials is very subtle and so one position 'Hid' is
indicated whereas in practice the saxophonist is constantly using their ear to 'sing' the note
as they play it which ensures the correct tongue position is reached.
Although vowel shapes cannot hope to cover every partial possible on the instrument they
are a useful tool for a performer to utilise as they prepare extended techniques for
performance. As before the performer can exploit the tongue position in order to emphasise
pitch relationships within a multiphonic, or to regulate intonation when playing micro-tones,
or hit specific pitches within a harmonic series, depending upon the demands of the piece.
By using tongue positions and embouchure manipulations performers not only control an
extended technique but also highlight the role of the technique within the composition by
emphasising pitch relationships; microtonal tunings; and by emphasising beating patterns
112
using either the tongue in the case of multiphonics or through use of the voice to alter the
heterodyne relationships within multiple sounds. Understanding the acoustical behaviour of
their instrument enables the performer to alter either mechanical (fork fingerings and
ventings) or physiological (tongue and embouchure) preparations in order to present an
accurate and nuanced extended technique which serves the composition as a whole.
113
Chapter 3
The Preparation and Performance of Extended
Techniques Within Notated Music
Previously I have shown that choice of instrument, mouthpiece, reed, tongue position and
the control of air through the larynx all have a bearing on the sound which is created whilst
performing extended techniques. The relationship between the performer's understanding of
this physical dexterity within the oral cavity and the sound they wish to produce highlights
the importance of choice in the interpretation of these techniques. This interpretation begins
with the choice of sound a performer wishes to produce, and also in considering why that
particular sound is preferable when considering the thematic material that surrounds it. This
is dependant on the type of physical production technique needed in order to create the
appropriate sound, which demands a level of physical dexterity on the part of the performer
to decide: which sound is appropriate; how that sound is produced; and what can be done
to manipulate the parameters of an extended technique to further enhance its meaning
within the composition as a whole. Performers have different understandings of how
extended techniques work, and therefore of the physical method of sound production
needed to attain them. As the pedagogy in this area is limited to a few texts (as has been
discussed in chapter 1) it is largely left to the performer's discretion as to how each
technique should be approached within a composition. When experiencing performances of
works which include extended techniques it is interesting to note how different performers
achieve different sounds when performing these techniques, therefore posing questions as
to the approach to their methods of sound production.
An Exploration Into the Variation of Sounds in the Performance of

Extended Techniques.
A piece which has firmly established itself in the saxophone canon is Yoshimatsu's Fuzzy
Bird Sonata (1995) which receives performances from a wide variety of players, from
students to recording artists. The first movement of the sonata includes two different
extended techniques: a harmonic ascending glissando from the fundamental E4 (figure 3.1)
114
and later in the movement a passage of slap-tonguing mixed with normal pitches (figure
3.2). It is interesting to hear how each performer approaches the production of the
techniques involved. The piece was composed for the Japanese saxophonist Noboya Sugawa
who released the work on his album Fuzzy Bird (1991), and in this version the harmonic
glissando is produced by pitching the first partial of E4 and then using the tongue to carry
on the glissando by moving it back and upwards toward the hard palate thus creating the
necessary velocity of air needed to move through the remaining partials (track 44). Sugawa
finishes roughly around B6 which is the fifth partial of the low E fundamental, perhaps
lending his glissando a pleasing tonic-dominant effect. It is interesting to note that
Yoshimatsu has notated six 'harmoniques' in the score (including the fundamental as
number one) which could possibly explain Sugawa's decision to stop at
Fig.3.1 Yoshimatsu Fuzzy Bird Sonata (1991) Mvmt 1 figure B
partial number five. On Rob Buckland's album Towards the Light (2009) he approaches this
technique in a similar way to Sugawa; however, before he reaches the first partial there is a
subtle use of regular fingering mixed with tongue movement beginning the glissando much
lower in the register than would be possible if using only the partials of E4 (track 45).
Buckland finishes his glissando much higher in the saxophone's register ending at around F
– F#7 which equates to the eighth partial of the fundamental. The most recent release of
the Fuzzy Bird Sonata by Sarah Markham on the album Sing, Run, Fly (2011) reveals a third
interpretation of this technique; Markham's glissando is much shorter in duration than either
Sugawa or Buckland's as Markham begins her glissando on the sixth partial and uses her
tongue to move through partial seven to stop on partial eight (track 46).
The differences between these three performers' interpretation of extended techniques is
115
further highlighted by the passage of slap-tonguing towards the middle of the movement as
shown in Figure 3.2. When listening to Sugawa's version the percussive effect of the slap-
tongue is clearly audible throughout the saxophone's range. Sugawa cleanly moves between
the curled tongue position required for slap-tonguing and normal tongue shape which
Fig.3.2 Yoshimatsu Fuzzy Bird Sonata (1991) Mvmt 1 figure J
places the tongue further back in the oral cavity, achieving a seamless transition between
the two styles (track 47). If we again compare the recordings of Buckland and Markham we
find that both saxophonists fail to produce a significant percussive effect whilst interpreting
this slap-tongue notation, instead playing the noted 'x's' very lightly as if employing the jazz
(associated) technique of 'ghosting' the notes (Buckland's version is track 48 and
Markham's is track 49). This large difference between recorded versions of the piece, and
indeed the sounds produced, pose questions regarding the performance and interpretation
of extended techniques in performance: what is the composer's intention for this
technique?; what is the contextual role of the technique within this composition?; what
physical manipulations and abilities are required in order to achieve these sounds?
More subtle variations in sound can usually be heard whilst performing multiphonics due to
the nature of their acoustic makeup as they are generally produced by multiple harmonic
series' (resulting from two or more sinusoids being present) sounded simultaneously. This
116
tonal variance can be controlled with greater or lesser accuracy depending on the type of
multiphonic being performed; type B multiphonics (see Chapter 1) are usually easy to
manipulate due to their widely spaced partials whereas type E dyads are very closely spaced
and thus the opportunity for control is diminished. If we consider the multiphonics used in
Berio's Sequenza IXb (1980, figure 3.3) it would seem from their narrow dyad sound that
these multiphonics do not have much variance within them for the performer to manipulate.
Fig.3.3 Luciano Berio Sequenza Ixb (1980) figure J
On the other hand, by consulting Kientzy's book Les Sons Multiples Aux Saxophones (2003)
it can be seen that the fingerings that are given correspond with multiphonics that are not
in fact type Eb dyads but are type A which make them an octave plus a twelfth. This means
that in performances of this work following the fingering given in the score the performer
has to manipulate these two multiphonics to suppress the unwanted partials. The first
multiphonic corresponds to Kientzy number 36 and the second to Kientzy number 13 as
shown in figure 3.4. Both of these multiphonics have low partials sounding beneath the
strongest sounding partials which need to be suppressed if the illusion of a dyad is to be
achieved. An example of this suppression can be heard on tracks 50 and 51, where I have
recorded Kientzy multiphonic numbers 36 and 13 respectively.
117
Fig.3.4 Kientzy multiphonic numbers 36 and 13 as taken from Les Sons Multiples Aux Saxophones (2003)
Whilst listening to two different recordings of the work it is evident that these multiphonics
are being used in both cases, with the performer manipulating the mulitphonics in slightly
different ways. In the first recording taken from Claude Delangle's The solitary Saxophone
(1994) Delangle manages to suppress the partial sounding at C6 of Kientzy multiphonic
number 36, giving a dyad in which the F5 is sounded but the Eb5 is an octave lower as can
be heard on track 52. This is done by tuning the vocal tract so that it reSonata s with the F5
ensuring that the higher C6 does not sound. By contrast Wallace Halliday's recording of the
same piece taken from Berio – Sequenzas I-XIV (2006, track 53) Halliday sounds the Eb as
the strongest partial of his first multiphonic, losing strength in the sustained F5 but at the
same time pitching both pitches in the correct octave. As the pitch Eb4 does not appear in
Kientzy number 36 it is my suspicion that Halliday has chosen another multiphonic which
includes the two pitches, perhaps Kientzy number 20 as shown in figure 3.5 (track 54), in
order to keep the thematic material in tact. The second multiphonic is suppressed in much
the same manner as Delangle achieves, generating the desired dyad. More elements of
physical manipulation are evident when listening to both Delangle and Halliday's versions of
Sequenza VIIb (1995) on the same recordings during which the listener can hear
118
Fig.3.5 Kientzy multiphonic number 20 as taken from Les Sons Multiples Aux Saxophones (2003)
differences in the sounds of the multiphonics produced toward the end of the piece as
shown in figure 3.6. This feature is generated by switching between fingerings for the upper
partials and fingerings for the multiphonics themselves, creating a sustained tone with a
multiphonic which appears beneath it. In Delangle's version (track 55) he manages to
sustain the D#6 throughout the gesture as Berio notates in the score; however, in Halliday's
version (track 56) the lower fundamentals of the multiphonic are much stronger and block
out the sustained note which is also slightly de-tuned. The reason for this could be due to
one of two things; it could be that with an incorrect tongue position and vocal tract tuning
Halliday is not able to pitch and sustain the D#3 or that his saxophone and mouthpiece
combination simply does not produce the partials in the same way that Delangle's does for
that specific multiphonic fingering. It has already been mentioned in the introduction to this
thesis how Berio himself acknowledged the unreliability of multiphonic intervals, and indeed
Redgate explains how recent versions of the score for Sequenza VII for oboe have been
altered to accommodate microtonal intervals which are the resulting sound from these
techniques (Redgate, 2007). The composer's acknowledgement of the variability of these
intervals is significant as it gives the performer the chance to decide for himself which pitch
relationships in the multiphonic are important to the piece. In Philip Thomas's article
119
entitled Berio Sequenza IV: Approaches to Performance and Interpretation (2007) Thomas
discusses tonality in Berio's music, noting that Berio himself saw the Sequenzas as a logical
extension of the classical tradition, rather than a rebellion against it (Thomas, 2007 p.195).
Thomas goes on to state that 'it follows that at least some of the melodic material will have
a degree of tonal pull' (Thomas, 2007 p.196), and this is evident when listening to each
recording of Sequenza VIIb where both performers have chosen different intervals to
accentuate with Delangle choosing the sustaining D5 over the lower intervals to create a
sustained line, and Halliday preferring to highlight the intervals in the multiphonic.
Tuning the vocal tract is a technique which performers use to control many of these
techniques as the vocal tract and larynx pairing is important in controlling the air as it
enters the instrument. In Betsy Jolas' piece Épisode Quatrième (1983) the player is required
to use the voice alongside the saxophone's sounding pitch to create the harmony shown in
figure 3.7. The composer uses a double stave to indicate this harmony, the lower of which is
the vocal part with the saxophone's line above. It is usual for the saxophonist to assume
Fig.3.7 Betsy Jolas Épisode Quatrième (1983) page 4 line 5
that the vocal part is transposed to the saxophone's pitch in order for the instrumentalist to
pitch their notes from their instrument. In the case of Épisode Quatrième both pitches begin
in unison on C5; however, the voice remains static as the saxophone's pitch rises. Claude
Delangle's version of Épisode Quatrième from his album The Solitary Saxophone (1994)
includes a very strong vocal part so as to be heard over the saxophone and thus the interval
of a major second is very clear as the saxophone ascends as can be heard on track 57. In
120
Daniel Kientzy's version from his album Saxophone(s) Solo (1984, track 58) the listener can
hear a slightly weaker vocal part which seems to sweep upwards pre-empting the
saxophone's movement, this therefore makes the specific interval of a major second
unclear. Similarly when the technique of singing and playing is repeated later in the piece
Delangle's version pitches the vocal part sharp from an A4 to an A4 three quarter-tones
sharp, which results in the creation of complex beating patterns against the following B4
whilst not quite remaining faithful to the score. It is indeed possible that each performer
aims for the given pitch and has simply over or under pitched their note during the
recording session, or it could also be their intention to emphasise the effect the voice has on
the saxophone's tone, once again posing the question, 'which of the relationships in this
piece are to be emphasized, to be made explicit?' (Cone, 1968, p.34).
Performers' Perspectives of Interpreting Extended Techniques.

Based upon what has already been discussed in previous chapters the practical use of
extended techniques in live performance poses some questions such as: what purpose does
the technique serve in the piece as a whole? How do I need to alter my normal technique in
order to make the extended technique sound in the way I want it to? How is my choice of
instrument and mouthpiece/ligature/reed set up going to affect the resultant sound? When
interviewing performers who use extended techniques in either notated compositions or in
improvised music it is found that much common ground is shared in answer to these
questions. To highlight this common ground and to begin a discussion pertaining to the
above questions I have interviewed seven saxophonists, five readers of notated music and
two improvisers. The saxophonists who are represented in the following discussion are Evan
Parker, Rob Buckland, John Butcher, Frank Gratkowski, Simon Haram, John Harle, Franziska
Schroeder, and Andy Scott.
The Relationship Between Equipment Choice and the Resultant

Sound
The improviser John Butcher asserts that 'if you stood four different players in a room and
said “play this multiphonic” you'd get four different sounds.' We have already seen in the
121
chapter on acoustics how different equipment alters the resultant sound of the saxophone
and the extended technique being articulated. Butcher goes on to say that he plays a
specific mouthpiece with a specific saxophone in order to achieve a specific sound. This idea
is echoed by Rob Buckland, who makes the differentiation between 'classical' and 'jazz'
mouthpiece functions as follows:
Jazz equipment... the responsibility of the individual to superimpose a sound

on [jazz equipment] is much smaller... the mouthpiece does most of the work.
Whereas [classical players] play on a C* or an AL3 on a Selmer type
saxophone we all sound different: because it's so closed we have to open up
behind it therefore the superimposition is greater [due to] our own vocality
and resonance.
Indeed Buckland goes even further into this idea behind the relationship between the
superimposition of an individual player and the sounds they produce by considering the
following point:
I'm six-foot-one-and-a-bit maybe the way this [saxophone] plays the

[resultant] resistance that [it] generates suits my build. I have a student
who's five foot two, maybe they don't generate the same air stream so that
doesn't balance the same way they like it.
This further highlights the importance of the relationship between player, instrument and
mouthpiece and reed setup due to individual physiology. When asked how important the
relationship between equipment choice and extended technique is, internationally renowned
soloist John Harle replied:
Not very. Obviously some set-ups prohibit extended techniques because of

either reed inflexibility or mouthpiece chamber shape, but most players have
difficulty with extended techniques because of very poor air support and
unnaturally high levels of muscular tension constricting the reed, airflow and
resonance within the oral chamber.
This indicates that although there is a relationship between equipment choice and the
resultant sounds, the air support and internal manipulation is far more important when
playing these techniques. Buckland supports the theory that some mouthpieces hinder reed
flexibility by stating that when his students 'play one of these Christian Lauba things they
have to play that on a “soft” setup otherwise the multiphonics or the slap tongue doesn't
122
work'. Buckland here is making the point that although this 'soft' setup is useful for an
extended technique-heavy piece such as Lauba's works, the tone this creates may not be
suitable for other works in the saxophone canon.
Andy Scott also stresses the importance of the correct mouthpiece setup as follows:
the mouthpiece and reed set up will enable you to execute extended
techniques, but won't do it for you! The reed mustn't close up onto the
mouthpiece - so the balance between reed strength and opening of
mouthpiece is vital, this is where the performer needs experience to really
understand this situation. So, when the muscular pressure of the embouchure
is in use, the air must be able to go into the instrument freely. The key, is
flexibility of the throat/tongue/larynx, coupled with control and manipulation
of the airflow/support.
Finding a compromise between tone and flexibility in equipment set up is mentioned by both
Dr. Franziska Schroeder and soloist Simon Haram, both of whom do not change their
mouthpiece setup to aid extended techniques. Haram explains:
I don't change my set up to play special effects. if I can't get them with a
"proper" set up I get as near as possible and leave it at that. If the composer
wants something extraordinary and leaves time to change mouthpiece for
example that's fine but normally these effects come thick and fast in amongst
regular playing and I don't like to compromise things for the sake of a "trick".
The compromise between practicality and ease of manipulation appears to be important to
each performer due to the need to be flexible in their playing approach and indeed in their
repertoire choice.
The Balance Between Established and Extended Saxophone

Technique
Alongside the choice of equipment for those who perform extended techniques lies their
own personal philosophy about general playing technique, all of which has a bearing on the
sounds they expect to produce within a composition. Again on this topic (and perhaps
unsurprisingly) there are large areas of common ground, with some slight deviations
depending on the individual's understanding. John Harle notes that he himself does not use
what is thought of as the standard breathing technique in that he has developed a technique
of vocal fold manipulation pressurised from the lungs using clavicular breathing (possibly a
123
mixture of 'high' and 'low' breaths as described in the previous chapter). He explains:
The air I use is highly pressurised from the lungs, and the embouchure is to all
intents and purposes 'passive' and very relaxed. Vocal fold training and
exercise is as important as larynx or oral cavity manipulation, and certainly
more reliable.
Here we have another confirmation that it is what happens inside the player's body that
effects what happens to the saxophone itself.
Buckland has the theory that the tongue inside the saxophonist's oral cavity is completing a
'virtual cone' inside the oral cavity; by which he means that the pressure created by the
proximity of the tongue to the soft palate is similar to the point at which the saxophone's
parabolic curve would have come to an end were it to continue to a point. To demonstrate
this he surmised that when playing an altissimo D7 on the alto's crook the fingers do not
need to do anything as the crook is tuned to F4 and therefore the D is the fifth partial of
that F according to the harmonic series. After demonstrating this successfully he went on to
describe how tongue position also affects different sizes of saxophone:
I think that the position your tongue goes in... on lets say a high C on the alto
is in the same position as if I was to play a high F on the soprano, which is the
same as a super F on the tenor... a top Bb on the soprano is the same as a
super G on the alto.
Buckland expands this point by discussing how we 'learn by listening' in order to
successfully produce the whole range of harmonics, that is to say that the correlation
between the control and dexterity needed within the oral cavity and the desired sound can
only be learned through muscle memory as each player is different. Buckland uses the
analogy 'it's like listening to sculpture' in that in abstract the two things are entirely
different yet we as performers are attempting to achieve a certain sound from a seemingly
(as far as normal playing technique goes) unrelated part of our physiology. Some of the
performers interviewed mentioned the importance of singing in relation to the production of
successful harmonics when preparing extended techniques, backing up the study seen in
the previous chapter which concluded that saxophonists learn to tune their vocal tract
124
(Chen, Smith, Wolfe, 2008). Frank Gratkowski put the most importance on this
demonstrating how he vocalises everything he plays (not just extended techniques) in order
to learn the harmonic language of a piece. Berlin-based improviser and composer Frank
Gratkowski also believes in the use of an individuals' vocal tract to play not only extended
techniques but also for regular playing, adding the point that the player must allow the
instrument to do the work: a point he learned through his studies with the late jazz legend
Steve Lacy who would tell him 'you have to follow the instrument, not play the right
harmonics'.
With this point in mind then it stands to reason how each different performer may produce a
different sound whilst playing the same multiphonic or harmonic. Gratkowski takes issue
with the conclusion of a paper by Chen et al noting that 'I can't sing so high!'. This comment
raises the point that saxophonists being both male and female and also being expected to
play all sizes of the instrument cannot possibly cover the entire range vocally, and therefore
this tuning of the vocal tract must be approximate and not necessarily at the correct octave
in order to be effective. Simon Haram discussed a technique-specific approach to extended
techniques by noting that:
multiphonics tend to be all slightly different and so some work better top
down and vice versa. I don't have a one size fits all approach. 1/4 tones are
also a mixed bag, some working very successfully and some either very
impractical or impossible. Some are available by good finger combinations and
some are cludges achieved by compromising the embouchure.
The observation that some multiphonics work best sounding the lowest or the highest
partial first is a common experience for most saxophonists, as the physiology needed to
manipulate each multiphonic fully is so specific as to be impossible to learn for each of the
180 multiphonics for alto alone.
Performers' Perspective on Composers' Use of Extended Techniques

The employment of extended techniques within compositions is a divisive issue between the
different performers. Andy Scott describes his approach to the use of extended techniques
125
within a composition thus:
It's how intelligently the composer has used these techniques that is of
interest to me. Generally I see them as colours, and colours only, they have to
fit within an overall form and shape of a piece to be effective. I've heard
pieces of music that consist entirely of colours, which unfortunately doesn't
have any emotional impact with the listener and shape/direction.
Andy Scott makes reference to an improvisation he recorded for his CD Xilitia-Stairway to
the Stars (2010) which uses multiphonics as tone colours:
Extended techniques do add colour, and if used wisely are extremely effective.
I use them in improvised music... One track is solo sax multiphonics - I chose
specific multiphonics that would create tension and release, both dynamically
and harmonically, and overall that would create a shape and feeling of
journey.
This approach seems common to improvisers who need to use extended techniques as
compositional tools but not necessarily as harmonic language, which has been seen
previously in John Coltrane's work and also in the thesis A Thesaurus of Saxophone
Multiphonics and a Guide to their Practical Application (Phelps,1998). The idea that a
composition can reflect a zeal for over-using extended techniques is also referred to by
Simon Haram who reveals:
I personally don't enjoy pieces that look like the composer has discovered
"101 mad things to do with a saxophone part 2" and just tried as hard as
possible to squeeze them all in. Many young composers I have worked with
seem absolutely fascinated with extended techniques and are desperate to
use them all the time. This seems the wrong way round to me as they often
haven't got much to say with regular notes yet and extended stuff often feels
like they're running before they can walk!
It seems that the performers prefer to experience 'intelligent' use of extended techniques,
principally regarding the techniques as 'a natural form of expression in the palette of colours
available on the instrument' (John Harle) rather than as solid compositional material. Indeed
Rob Buckland points out some problems he experienced with a composer who wished to use
multiphonics in order to build up harmonic material in a saxophone quartet:
there must be fifty of these [multiphonics] in a row, and you meet up for
rehearsal and he says “well, they were just suggestions but if you know any
others you can play those”. So you've been struggling for hours with those that
don't make a noise and you play him something else he goes “yeah that's
126
great”. So it's composer-specific.
On the other hand Frank Gratkowski describes how he wished to use specific multiphonics in
one of his own compositions for multiple players, however, he came across a problem to do
with equipment:
[on] that [saxophone] it works but it's much more difficult. So I try to find
ones but then... when I use them in a composition I definitely want people to
find something close... I had a mark VI when I wrote it then I couldn't play the
piece anymore as long as I played that thing [pointing to his Selmer reference
54]. So it's impossible... I just wrote a piece for alto saxophones only
multiphonics... one had to really redefine the whole thing. I said: find similar
horns because [the player] had the old Martin horn which was totally different.
So you know he needed different fingerings. And the other two guys had a
mark VI and even on a mark VI it sounds a little bit different to this one
[Reference 54].
Gratkowski is here confirming how using different equipment can drastically alter the sound
produced when using multiphonics and harmonics. Some mulitphonics are more stable than
others and Buckland notes that:
whereas the Lauba ones... because they're written by a saxophone player

that's the only option and they work really well. Because he knows what he's
doing.
Buckland is asserting here that when performing a piece composed of familiar, stable
multiphonics that are easy to control, the margin for sonic difference is smaller than when
playing un-stable multiphonics that are easily changeable due to tongue and throat
placement.
The Need for Collaboration

Rob Buckland notes how many composers have in the past over-used extended techniques
within compositions without giving thought as to the dexterity needed during the
performance of the work:
composers fall into that trap where they hear a saxophonist doing something
like this and its all very exciting... so then they go for the Kientzy book and
they have a look and find out what the ones that work are, most people use
the same three or four anyway. They write it in the music... then they leave
that up to interpretation. Of course most... non-saxophone players don't have
127
the understanding of how they're generated and so therefore they're normally
swayed by a big personality saying “I'm going to do it like this!”.
Many of the performers interviewed agreed that books like Kientzy's Les Sons Multiples Aux
Saxophones (2003), and Weiss & Netti's The Art of Saxophone Playing (2010) which include
tables of extended multiphonic and monophonic possibilities often forget that the production
of such techniques relies heavily on not only the fingers, but as we have seen in previous
chapters the large amount of vocal, laryngeal and tongue dexterity needed for their
successful production and manipulation. Simon Haram mentions that:
I tend to try and work out what effect that composer is trying to create and try
to find something that fits the bill
an approach which seems to leave the performer guessing as to the composer's intention.
John Butcher shows a certain amount of discomfort with composers taking ownership of
extended techniques away from performers, making the point that most of these techniques
hail from world music which is largely taught through aural traditions:
People have been playing these techniques and making these sounds for
hundreds of years through music that has been passed down through tradition.
It is only recently that people have begun to start attempting to notate these
sounds that already exist. In a way the composers are only just catching up
with the performers.
Butcher is outlining the idea that music learned in this way is in contrast to notated music
having different histories and traditions surrounding them. Music that is learned through
tradition engages the player in learning different aspects of an instrument and its sounds,
whereas notated music explores a composer's use of harmony and thematic material but
not necessarily, in the case of solo pieces, a performer's individual style and timbre. It is
because of the ownership that instrumentalists have over their own sound-production
techniques that performers prefer a collaborative approach which allows them to guide a
composer towards techniques that can be successfully employed based on the ability of the
performer who will play them. This is of particular importance when considering an
approach to notation when writing the score which is, as Rob Buckland puts it, 'an inexact
128
representation' of the sound to be presented, effectively outlining the paradox that Butcher
presents us with of attempting to turn a two-dimensional graphical symbol into a three
dimensional sound. Buckland continues to describe how composers, preferring textbooks to
performer's advice, can be problematic to the very physiological phenomena they are trying
to harness:
the recall is just so demanding to remember... that's the fingering, I need to

think that note there, put my tongue in that position and play there... you
have to change so many things so quickly. This is what what composers
forget.
Franziska Schroeder prefers to collaborate with composers from her institution so that she
can be on hand to offer suggestions as to the use of techniques that are familiar to her. She
mentioned that 'I think most players have a list of multiphonics that they know and use
often', indeed this is backed up by both Gratkowski and Butcher who both recommended
creating a list of the multiphonics one knows and adding to that list every time you learn a
new one. There appears to be a divide between those who improvise (Butcher, Gratkowski,
Schroeder) and those who often play notated music (Buckland, Harle, Haram) as to the
merits of learning extended techniques like multiphonics by heart as the latter players seem
to rely on the score to inform them what to do, therefore do not have such a need for
memorization.
The Composer's Perception About the Interpretation of Extended

Techniques Within Their Own Compositions.
During the course of researching information for this thesis I have been able to collaborate
with composers who were eager to learn about extended techniques and to compose pieces
based around these techniques. In conversation with these composers it is evident that
although each of their compositional styles are different, their emphasis on a performer's
understanding of their musical style, philosophy, and musical principles was important in
each composer entrusting a performer with their composition. Ben Isaacs makes a direct
link between extended techniques on the saxophone and the style he wishes to portray in
his music, stating that:
129
the aim when adopting such techniques is to create a volatile and dynamic
performance situation in which the tactility of the sound and 'live-ness' of the
performer's action is an integral part of the musical experience.
Isaacs uses this in his piece I Never Look Like Myself (2010) by using extreme dynamics so
that his ascending microtones are barely heard, existing mostly within the niente dynamic
marking. Likewise, composer Ray Evanoff states that his use of extended techniques in
Diagramming a Vivisection of Yours and Mine (Ineffectual Tracings of Antiquated Sounds): A
Floregium (2010) is a result of 'a desire to instil my musical language born from timbral
variety, and a concern with the tactile aspects of instrumental execution.' In both cases the
composer is making reference to their goal of exploiting the transient nature of
performance, and of performing extended techniques, in order to promote a sound which is,
as Evanoff puts it, on the 'knife-edge of feasibility'. Evanoff does not wish to push his
performers into the realm of impracticality and mentions that 'crass neglect of an
instrument's inherent nature undermines the music's reliability', further noting that 'ideally,
a performer will trust that these techniques' impracticalities serve a greater purpose'.
A composer who writes music with a higher level of specificity is Scott Mc Laughlin whose
piece Neither Wholes nor Parts (2010) uses a graphical key as a score which acts as a
'mechanism' by which the music is made. Based solely around linking different multiphonics
through pitching single partials within them, Mc Laughlin explains how the written score
cannot exist without the performance directions to decipher the symbols. He states 'within
symbols there is a certain amount of flexibility within a graphical context', meaning that his
score blurs the line between what a performer sees written on the score and what sounds
are heard as the performer is free to choose the multiphonics that fit into the work the best.
When asked about the performer's relationship and learning curve with a new notational
system, Mc Laughlin points out that the score is not the point:
The point is those tipping points [between two sounds]... the point is the
[enharmonics] and getting out those multiphonic partials. Once someone
understands and accepts that then the [symbolism in the score] is pretty
clear.
130
Mc Laughlin believes that 'once someone accepts that that's a viable way to create a piece
of music then the notation works', indicating that the performer's understanding of the
score, in the case of Mc Laughlin's work, transcends the score itself.
By understanding the composer's intentions in using extended techniques within their
compositions, the performer can make decisions as to how to approach the production of
the techniques based upon this understanding. Delangle and Michat explain how this
acceptance of different styles based around the saxophone are an important part of its
continuing heritage:
Nineteenth-century saxophone music is virtually non-existent, the student has

hardly known the type of repertoire in which the fingers trust the ear. Instead,
he is brought up from the start in an atonal, often extremely chromatic,
language.
(Delangle & Michat, 1998 p.161)
The composers represented here are simply expanding musical language and therefore
instrumental technique and saxophonists are well placed to develop their instrument's
technique to advance it to the level of the orchestral woodwinds.
131
Chapter 4
Preparing Extended Techniques for the Saxophone:
7 Case Studies
An outline of extended technique usage has been given in the previous chapter but hitherto
no suggestions as to a performance method have been put forward. In this next section I
hope to demonstrate the relationship between the desired sound in the context of the
musical passage, the physical manipulation of the extended technique, and a knowledge of
the techniques and their acoustical behaviour, in order to present a working and
demonstrable method for performance. For the sake of clarity and structure I will present
my approach to these techniques in the same order as they were presented in chapter one.
Table 10 again shows the categories of extended techniques as derived from both Londeix,
(1989) and Weiss & Netti (2010), and through use of this classification I shall discuss the
techniques within each composition, and present ideas toward the performance of them
including the reasons for those decisions.
Table 10: Classifications of extended techniques as compiled as a combination of Weiss & Netti (2010) and
Londeix's (1989) suggestions
Pitch Altissimo
Mictrotones
Multiphonics Singing and playing
Multiphonics
Timbre techniques Timbral fingerings (Bisbigliando)
Embouchures techniques
Key percussion
Flutter tongue
Duration techniques Slap tongue (short duration)
Circular breathing (long duration)
This chapter is presented in two halves: the first half (sections 1, 2, 3, and 4) are case
studies of published pieces which feature in the saxophone's standard repertoire. Betsy
Jolas's Épisode Quatrième (1983) for tenor saxophone and Nicolaus A. Huber's Aus Schmerz
und Trauer for alto saxophone have both found their way into the standard repertoire for
132
concert saxophonists. Fuminori Tanada's Mysterious Morning III (1996) for soprano
saxophone and Ichirô Nodaïra's Arabesque III (1983) for alto saxophone and piano were
both commissioned by Claude Delangle and appear on his album entitled The Japanese
Saxophone (1998). All four works display a mastery of extended techniques achieving, in
the author's opinion, an integration of these extended techniques into the individual style of
the composer.
The second half of this chapter (sections 5, 6, and 7) presents three works that were
written for the author using a collaborative approach which was designed to retain the
integrity of the composer's individual style whilst at the same time creating a work in which
extended techniques are a feature. All three composers (Scott Mc Laughlin, Ben Isaacs and
Ray Evanoff) worked together with the author to ascertain the level of flexibility within an
extended technique in order to create a piece which showcases these nuances. This chapter
documents my approach to each individual work using the above criteria of extended
techniques, based upon my personal understanding of the important relationships within
each composition.
Section 1
Fuminori Tanada Mysterious Morning III (1996) For Soprano
Saxophone
The organisation of material in Fuminori Tanada's Mysterious Morning III (1996) offers the
performer hints as to the employment of the extended techniques that are used throughout
the piece. Tanada states in his performance directions that 'the piece should be played
straight through without stopping (excepted for pauses for breath), giving the impression of
a wild saxophonist nervously improvising, playing anxiously' and indeed there is evidence of
this in the score, including breath marks that represent 'panting (breathe deeply but
rapidly)' and the addition of 'avec souffle' or air sound to hint at a saxophonist who is losing
control over their embouchure allowing sound to escape. In the sleeve notes for Claude
Delangle's recording The Japanese Saxophone (1998) Delangle quotes Tanada: 'in
Mysterious Morning III I wished to create a state of sonic instability by means of extremely
virtuoso writing, with various playing techniques such as bisbigliato, irregular trills,
133
glissandi, sounds sung and played simultaneously, and micro-intervals; this instability is an
image of a man quivering with madness, a madness that he attempts to conceal within
himself; my wish was that the piece should sound like an improvisation' (Tanada in
Delangle, 1998). The image of a saxophonist who is trying to keep control not only of the
instrument but of themselves is an image which is also evident in the music as musical lines
and themes deteriorate through the use of these various playing techniques in a score that
often shows a repeated phrase which is treated differently each time it repeats through the
addition of a 'sonic instability' brought about by an extended playing technique. In order to
give 'the impression of a wild saxophonist nervously improvising' a performer can use the
microtonal nature of cross-fingerings, multiphonics and the harmonic series in order to
perform a piece that sounds spontaneous whilst at the same time exploiting relationships
within the music with the purpose of presenting the illusion of an improvisation.
Altissimo
The extension of the saxophone's normal range in this piece is not a technique which is
exploited; this is perhaps because this register on the soprano saxophone does not have the
same impact as it does on the other sizes of saxophone due to its extremely short
wavelength (upwards of 1396Hz) which can have the effect of being too shrill and therefore
un-musical. This results in many composers neglecting the use of altissimo on the soprano
saxophone as the common perception is, to quote saxophonist and composer Andy Scott:
'For me harmonics on the soprano sax just sound too high'. However, Tanada uses this
perception to his advantage as his use of altissimo D7 is juxtaposed with the instrument's
lowest note of Bb3, pitting the two extremes of the soprano saxophone's register against
one another in the listener's ear as shown in figure 4.1.1. As the frequency of this note is so
short it is difficult to exactly manipulate the vocal tract and tongue in order to pitch this
note; the usual 'heed' tongue position results in the altissimo C7 (1864Hz) on the fingering
given, and indeed other fingerings from Londeix (1989), Weiss & Netti (2010) and Rousseau
(1978). In order to pitch the altissimo D7 (2093Hz) the player must bring the tongue not
134
Fig.4.1.1 Fuminori Tanada Mysterious Morning III (1996) page 6 lines 6 and 7
only into the 'heed' position but also all the way back toward the rear of the oral cavity; this
makes the tongue expand across the back of the mouth and so raises it closer to the hard
palate to achieve the air velocity necessary to produce the frequency . Rarely does a player
adopt this extreme tongue position and it places some strain on the neck muscles and
tendons which are employed to push the tongue into this position; it is therefore alien and
uncomfortable to the player. Tanada's suggestion of the addition of the sixth finger to play a
bisbigliando on this note (see figure 4.1.1) results in a satisfactory raise of frequency by
approximately 2Hz (track 59). Because the frequency is so short another technique could be
employed to reach the D7 and this is to lightly place the bottom teeth against the reed in an
attempt to find the 'sweet spot' on the reed which will only allow a certain length of it to
vibrate and thus create a higher frequency. This method is extremely inaccurate, however,
and with this method the bisbigliando will not be effective as key venting does not work with
pitches produced by the reed in this way.
Harmonics
The specific usage of over-blown harmonics in this piece shows an understanding of the
flexibility of the instrument in this range. As was explained in chapter 2 of this thesis the
harmonic series can easily be sounded on a single fundamental through the adoption of the
different tongue positions which concentrate the air stream in accordance with Bernouilli's
principle. Tanada's stipulated sons aeolians (figure 4.1.2, track 24) is a reference to the
135
technique described in Londeix (1989) thus: 'The embouchure is not rigid, the lips are
relaxed, the chin is pulled in, the lower jaw is well down, only the sound of air will be
produced in the tone' (Londeix, 1989 p.81). This technique benefits from the use of throat
and tongue positions to follow the contours of the rhythmic line that is stipulated in the
score. Each time this technique is executed, the saxophonist can use the lower tongue
positions of 'hood' and 'who'd' to help sound the lower partials moving to 'heed' and 'hid' for
the higher partials in the usual way. A second use of harmonics in the work occurs on page
six of the score based around a passage of multiphonic trills. On the fifth line of the page
the composer includes a gesture during which the multiphonic trill decrescendos and then
crescendos back to its original volume as the highest partial of the multiphonic sounding on
its own as seen in figure 4.1.3.
It is important here for the saxophonist to be fully aware of the tongue position needed to
pitch the top note of the multiphonic each time, as it is the use of the tongue and throat
position that will enable the single partial to be pitched. It is the 'heed' position which will
accurately pitch the top note of the multiphonic allowing for it to be sounded independently,
however, by maintaining this position for the timbre trill that follows (on the same fingering)
136
the harmonic trill sounds at 990Hz (written C#6) trilling to 1050Hz (written D6). This is too
sharp for the notated C6 a quartertone sharp bisbigliando trill and so adopting the less
familiar 'who'd' tongue position pitches the top of the multiphonic but the relaxation of the
lips into the 'who'd' shape flattens the note sufficiently (960Hz or written B5 quarter tone
sharp trilling to 991Hz which equates to a written C5 quarter tone sharp) to differentiate
this bisbigliando from the microtonal trills that feature elsewhere in the piece.
Microtones
Tanada uses microtones throughout the work to achieve the effect of a minutely descending
melodic line with intervals that never quite stay static; in this way the melodic material
becomes a metaphor for the mental state of the anxious saxophonist the composer wishes
the performer to portray. The fingering that the composer supplies in the score for the
microtone depicted in figure 4.1.4 is a modification of the fingering from Weiss and Netti for
A4 quarter tone sharp, but whereas the Weiss and Netti fingering of bis plus the third finger
produces a frequency of 406Hz, the composer's suggestion of also adding the fifth finger
results in a flatter frequency of 403Hz because it uses a forked fingering. This miniscule
difference of 3Hz serves to change the sonic distance between the two notes by making the
interval even smaller and therefore highlighting the microtonally diminishing nature of the
phrase. This can be demonstrated numerically by working out the sonic distance between
each microtonal interval as compared to the standard tempered interval: the intervalic
difference between concert E4 to concert G#4 is 86Hz (415Hz-329Hz=244Hz), whereas the
intervalic difference between concert E4 and concert G4 quarter tone sharp is 74Hz (403Hz-
137
329Hz=74Hz). If we were then to repeat the same equation with other fingering choices we
would end up with a number of choices as follows:
Table 11: Suggested fingerings for alternative fingerings as taken from Weiss & Netti, Tanada, and Londeix's
fingering systems
Pitches Tanada Weiss/Netti Londeix Londeix
fingering fingering fingering 1 fingering 2
G4 quarter tone sharp 403Hz 406Hz 407Hz 412Hz
E4 329Hz 329HZ 329HZ 329Hz
Resultant intervalic 74Hz 77Hz 78Hz 83Hz
difference
The table shows the differences in interval that can be exploited through the use of different
fingering systems and it is clear that the composer has a specific idea of how close he wants
this microtonal interval to be in the listener's ear by adding a second forked fingering to
Weiss & Netti's suggested fingering closing the gap even more. To demonstrate this I have
recorded the interval in figure 4.1.4 using both Tanada's fingering system (track 60) and
using Weiss & Netti's fingering system (track 61). The feature of closing the sonic distance
between the intervals of the first page continues as Tanada introduces more microtones to
the phrase which alters the sonic difference between the two pitches. The written F#4 falls
to an F4 quarter tone sharp and so the intervalic difference changes again depending upon
which fingering is used:
Table 12: Suggested fingerings for alternative fingerings as taken from a mixture of Weiss & Netti, Tanada, and
Pitches Tanada fingering Weiss/Netti fingering Londeix fingering
G4 quarter tone sharp 403Hz 406Hz 407Hz
D4 three quarter tones 325Hz 324Hz 325Hz
sharp
Resultant intervalic 78Hz 82Hz 82Hz
difference
If we consider that the difference between concert D#4 and concert G4 is 81Hz (392Hz –
311Hz = 81Hz) then it seems that the Weiss & Netti fingering system is the best suited to
maintain the interval of a major third using microtonal versions of these pitches. There are
two problems with this fingering system. The first problem is that the fingering for Weiss &
138
Netti's F4 quarter tone sharp is the same as that of Kientzy multiphonic 46 for soprano as
shown in figure 4.1.5, and so some effort needs to be taken to suppress the resultant
Fig.4.1.5 Weiss & Netti's fingering for F4 quartertone sharp and Kientzy fingering for multiphonic number 46
partials that want to sound using the usual method of tongue and throat manipulation. A
low tongue position such as 'hod' helps in this instance to suppress the upper partials of the
multiphonic and sound only the lowest pitch. This multiphonic also appears later in the
phrase and although it is relatively easy to control the manifestation of the multiphonic from
the microtonal fingering using the oral cavity, altering the fingering serves as a marked
change between one and the other. The second problem for this fingering is that it uses the
low C key which the composer wishes us to keep free in order to use to create the
bisbigliando technique, a fact which renders the Weiss & Netti fingering system unusable as
there are no alternatives that will give the same bisbigliando effect without the use of the
low C key. It is for these reasons that a player can consider mixing two different fingering
systems in order to achieve the closest intervalic match for the major third interval through
the following combination:
Table 13: Suggested fingerings for the notes G4 quarter tone sharp and D4 three quarter tones sharp from Weiss &
Netti's and Londeix's fingering systems
Pitch Tanada fingering Weiss/Netti fingering
G4 quarter tone sharp 406Hz
D4 three quarter tones sharp 325Hz
Resultant intervallic difference 81Hz
139
All three resources agree on the fingering for F4 three quarter tones sharp which adds the
F# trill key to a regular F# fingering, venting it in such a way as to raise the pitch from
331Hz to 339Hz and once again microtonally diminishing the major third interval between
F#4 and A#4 for the microtonal interval in figure 4.1.6. The technique of microtonally
augmenting and diminishing the interval of a third (either major or minor) continues on
page seven of the score when the whole passage gradually descends but the top and the
bottom notes of the intervals within this overall descent are altered in microtonal
increments. The first interval is that of a written C5 three quarter tones sharp with an A4
quarter tone sharp as the lower note as in figure 4.1.7. We have already experimented with
the fingerings for A4 quarter tone sharp (concert G4 quarter tone sharp) and so due to the
implied minor third interval between the two notes it is once again appropriate to compare
fingerings to see which combination is the most accurate.
Fig.4.1.7 Fuminori Tanada Mysterious Morning III (1996) page 7 lines 2-4
140
The intervalic difference between concert G4 and concert B4 (493Hz – 392Hz) is 101Hz, and
so this is the target interval for our fingering combinations.
Pitch (concert) Tanada fingering Weiss/Netti Londeix fingering
fingering 1
G4 quarter tone sharp 403Hz 406Hz 407Hz
B4 three quarter tones sharp 510Hz 519Hz 512Hz
Intervallic difference 107Hz 113HZ 105Hz
I have discounted Londeix's second fingering for G4 quarter tone sharp due to its
anomalous high frequency (412Hz) as compared to the other alternatives. The above table
shows that Londeix's fingerings result in the closest interval to the target of 101Hz;
however, we have not yet mixed fingering systems to compare intervallic difference as
follows:
Table 15: Resulting intervals for mixed fingering combinations taken from Weiss & Netti, Tanada, and Londeix's
suggesations
Respective pitches Tanada/Weiss&Netti Tanada/Londeix 1 Weiss&Netti/Londeix
1
Lower pitch/Upper 104Hz 103Hz 112Hz
pitch
Upper pitch/Lower 116Hz 106Hz 105Hz
pitch
Having mixed the fingering systems the combination of Londeix's fingering for the upper
pitch (B4 three quarter tones sharp) and Weiss & Netti's fingering for the lower pitch results
in the closest match for the minor third interval implied in the passage. The fingerings for
the next intervals in this passage can be calculated in a similar way by working out the
target interval and finding the fingerings that achieve the closest sound.
Table 16: Suggested fingerings for alternative fingerings as taken from a mixture of Weiss & Netti, Tanada, and
Respective pitches Tanada/Weiss&Netti Tanada/Londeix 1 Weiss&Netti/Londeix 1
Lower pitch/Upper (386Hz-518Hz) (386Hz-485Hz) (386Hz-485Hz)
pitch = 132Hz =100Hz = 100Hz
Upper pitch/Lower (485Hz-386Hz) (485Hz-386Hz) (518Hz-386Hz)
pitch = 99Hz = 99Hz = 132Hz
141
Target intervallic 96Hz 96Hz 96Hz
difference (466Hz -
370Hz)
The above table shows two possible combinations which are closest to the target interval (in
italics) and so it again comes down to practicality to decide which is the appropriate
fingering combination. Londeix's fingering for written G three quartertones sharp involves
less fingers being depressed than Weiss & Netti's suggestion makes it the desirable fingering
for this passage, as fewer fingers makes for an efficient movement from one fingering to the
other which helps with speed. The final interval of the passage depicted in figure 4.1.4 is
another implied major third between written A4 three quarter tones sharp and F4 three
quarter tones sharp. All three sources agree on the fingering combinations for this interval
and the resultant intervalic difference is 87Hz with a target interval of 86Hz.
The second use of microtones in Tanada's composition serves to bring consecutive pitches
closer together as on page 3 of the score where the interval of a major second appears in
microtones between a written E6 a quarter tone flat and D4 a quarter tone sharp (figure
4.1.8). Tanada here presents us with the suggestion to play the regular chromatic version of
the pitches but to leave the first finger down creating one finger fork in order to flatten the
note.
Again it can be determined which fingerings are appropriate both sonically and practically by
measuring the resultant frequencies of each fingering:
Target pitch (concert) Tanada fingering Weiss/Netti fingering Londeix fingering
D6 quarter tone flat 1170Hz 1167Hz 1160Hz
C6 quarter tone sharp 1064Hz 1100Hz 1100Hz
142
C6 11046Hz 1046Hz 1046Hz
It should be noted that in the above table the values in italics are derived from the same
fingerings. Given that the frequency of D6 is 1174Hz it is clear both numerically and
sonically that Tanada's fingering in this case produces a note that is too sharp to be
identified as a D6 quarter tone flat, it being sonically closer to a D6 one eighth tone flat.
This leaves us with a choice between Weiss & Netti's and Londeix's fingerings, which differ
in their feasibility; practically Londeix's fingering albeit slightly lower in pitch uses two non-
adjacent left hand palm keys (C1 with C4) whilst Weiss & Netti's fingering uses the right
hand alongside a single left hand palm key (C4 with C3). This means that the Weiss &
Netti's fingering is preferable as it can be executed at the speed required in all instances
involving the above pitches because it uses two different hands rather than one hand trying
to operate two no-adjacent keys. An extensive passage of consecutive microtones appears
on page seven in a descending scale of micro-intervals as can be seen in figure 4.1.9. Using
the same method of determining fingerings based upon their frequencies as compared to
the frequency of the closest tempered frequency gives the performer insight into which
fingerings may be appropriate.
Pitches (concert) Tanada Weiss/Netti Londeix Londeix Closest
fingering fingering fingering 1 fingering 2 tempered
frequency
D5 three quarter 652Hz 651Hz 651Hz 622Hz
tones sharp
D5 quarter tone 612Hz 612Hz 612Hz 587Hz
sharp
143
C5 three quarter 581Hz 583Hz 563Hz 554Hz
tones sharp
A4 quarter tone 459Hz 453Hz 459Hz 466Hz 440Hz
sharp
G4 three quarter 429Hz 429Hz 429Hz 415Hz
tones sharp
G4 quarter tone 403Hz 406Hz 407Hz 412Hz 392Hz
sharp
The chosen fingerings for this passage are in italics. This method ensures that the
descending line of the passage can be performed accurately and that the closeness of the
microtonal phrase is highlighted as much as possible.
Singing and Playing

The composer writes in the performance directions that 'the voice part should be sung very
slightly higher or lower than the instrumental line so as to create beats' (Tanada, 1996). We
have already seen the effect altering a sinusoid has on the resulting heterodyne
components, and the same mathematics can be applied to the vocal parts in this piece so as
to determine whether singing sharp or flat as compared to the accompanying pitch is likely
to create the most frequent and complex beating pattern. The first instance of singing and
playing simultaneously occurs on page three of the score where the vocal part closely
imitates the descending semi-quavers starting on a written F# and descending from that
point (figure 4.1.10). In the following table, which uses the heterodyne component equation
144
taken from Benade's Fundamentals of musical acoustics (1976), P represents the vocal part
which is sung an eighth-tone higher than written (approx 670Hz), and Q represents the
saxophone playing the notated F#5 (659Hz).
Table 19: Heterodyne component table with values taken from Tanada Mysterious Morning III (1996) page 3 line 1
Original Simplest Heterodyne

Components Components
670Hz (P) (2P) = 1340Hz
(P+Q) = 1329Hz
(P-Q) = 11Hz
659Hz (Q) (2Q) = 1318Hz
Musically this creates a very close cluster of microtonal notes that can be represented in
concert pitch as follows:
Fig.4.1.11 Musical representation of the resultant sounds from the heterodyne relationships between the
saxophone's concert E5 and the voice's concert E5 sung sharp
The equation is now repeated but this time the vocal part is sung a quarter tone lower than
written; in this new table the saxophone's written F#5 is now represented by P and the
vocal part is represented as Q:
Table 20: Heterodyne component table with values taken from Tanada Mysterious Morning III (1996) page 3 line 1
Original Simplest Heterodyne
Components Components
659Hz (P) (2P) = 1318Hz
145
(P+Q) = 1300Hz
(P-Q) = 18Hz
641Hz (Q) (2Q) = 1282Hz
With the resultant musical representation appearing as follows:
saxophone's concert E5 and the voice's concert E5 sung flat
The musical representations show how each incarnation of this heterodyne action creates
beating patterns between the different versions of E6 due to the variance of E5; however, it
is a matter of opinion as to which of these is appropriate for this passage. To this end both
versions can be heard on the accompanying CD; with the vocal part sung slightly sharp on
track 62, and slightly flat on track 63. As the vocal part is descending in this instance
vocalising the voice part slightly lower as in the second example will also create heterodyne
tension between the (lower) notes that follow in the remainder of the passage, and for this
reason I have chosen to vocalise the F#6 slightly lower than pitch.
The second occurrence of this technique is the sharp or flat vocalisation of a Bb3 alongside a
tempered Bb3 played by the saxophone as displayed in figure 4.1.13.
146
The following table shows the heterodyne behaviour of this new pairing of sinusoids.
Table 21: Resulting frequencies from heterodyne components sounded during Fuminori Tanada Mysterious Morning
Equation Sharp vocalisation Flat vocalisation
P 213 (voice) 207 (saxophone)
Q 207 (saxophone) 200 (voice)
2P 426 414
2Q 414 400
P+Q 420 407
P-Q 6 7
With the resultant musical representations as follows:
saxophone's concert Ab3 and the voice's concert Ab3 sung sharp (left) and flat (right)
The musical representation of these heterodyne relationships shows that singing the vocal
part slightly flatter than the saxophone's pitch creates a closer beating pattern as in the first
example (sharp vocalisation) each pitch is a version of G three quarter tones sharp whereas
in the second version (flat vocalisation) the pitches shift to include the pitch of G alongside
both G quarter tone sharp and G three quarter tones sharp. Again both version can be
heard on tracks 64 (sharp vocalisation) and 65 (flat vocalistaion). This cluster of heterodyne
activity from singing the vocal part slightly flatter than pitch seems to provide the beating
patterns that the composer has asked for in the performance directions.
147
Multiphonics
The multiphonics used in the work mostly serve to demonstrate the microtonally descending
lines which are an identifying feature of the piece, and it is for this reason that Tanada's
choice and subsequent notation of the multiphonics are significant in developing this theme
that has already been established to the listener through use of the techniques previously
discussed. On line three of the sixth page of the score the descending line is notated in the
middle notes of each multiphonic trill giving the impression of a descending passage whilst
the surrounding partials of the multiphonics are static (figure 4.1.15). The multiphonic
which begins this descending passage is a variation on Kientzy number 20 which
Fig.4.1.15 Fuminori Tanada Mysterious Morning III (1996) page 6 lines 3 & 4
is a type B multiphonic that replaces the low C key we find in Kientzy number 20 (as shown
in figure 4.1.16, track 66) with the Eb key, which flattens the middle partial of the
multiphonic from 647Hz to 632Hz effectively changing that note from a written F#5 (659Hz)
to an F5 natural (622Hz). The addition of the F# trill key to this fingering has the effect
of changing the middle partial note from 632Hz (nearly an F5) to 664Hz (nearly an F#5)
whilst maintaining the other partials as Tanada's notation suggests. The second multiphonic
Fig.4.1.16 Kientzy multiphonic number 20 taken from Les Sons Multiples Aux Saxophones (2003)
148
used alongside Kientzy number 20 is to be found not in Kientzy's book but as multiphonic
number 8 in Weiss & Netti (2010) and also in Londeix (1989) as shown in figure 4.1.17
(track 67).
Fig.4.1.17 Weiss & Netti (2010) multiphonic number 8 and the same fingering as shown in Londeix (1989)
This fingering is also modified through use of the Eb key (enharmonically named the D# key
in Londeix's book) which again has the effect of flattening the middle partial to the desired
pitch. The final multiphonic to be trilled to is number five in Weiss & Netti, and number
three in Londeix, although once again the Low C key is substituted for the Eb key. This
substitution, which is present for each multiphonic in this passage, not only flattens the note
so that an F5 can be heard but it also means that the saxophonist can leave this finger
down throughout the entire passage making for a quick transition between trills. The final
trill of the passage is between two new multiphonics; Kientzy number 85 trilling to Kientzy
number 1 through use of trilling the same Eb key (both multiphonics can be heard on track
68).
Fig.4.1.18 Kientzy multiphonic numbers 1 and 85 taken from Les Sons Multiples Aux Saxophones (2003)
149
Tanada's fingerings present an ergonomically feasible and musically accurate series of
multiphonic trills for this passage; however, as these multiphonics have a strong sounding
middle partial the saxophonist must take care to consistently sound the surrounding partials
of the multiphonic, as there is a danger that without the correct lip shape and tongue
position only the strong partials will sound and the passage will become monophonic. When
playing these particular multiphonics the tongue can be held in the same positions
throughout the passage as they are each modifications of the same basic multiphonic and
therefore the multiphonic type is maintained. Alongside the use of the 'who'd' tongue
position which is employed in the production of this technique the jaw is to be dropped
slightly downwards decreasing the lip tension on the reed and therefore allowing it to
vibrate in a slightly different way. If the jaw is not dropped in this way then the stronger
middle partial of the multiphonic will sound on its own and again the passage will become
monophonic because the tongue position does not affect the air stream enough in this
instance to be effective as the only method of manipulation. If this mixture of tongue
placement and jaw displacement is adopted then the multiphonics throughout this entire
passage can be performed without further alteration, maintaining both the presence and the
tuning of all partials. Apart from its use in Tanada's descending phrases in this piece,
Kientzy multiphonic number 46 appears on the first page of the score alongside the
microtonal interval of F#4 and A4 quarter tone sharp (figure 4.1.19). The lower note of this
multiphonic is notated as an F#4 and as such acts as a replacement for the preceding
version of this note in the phrase to keep the microtonal interval intact, and if we consider
150
that a written F#4 sounds at 329Hz and the lowest pitch of this multiphonic sounds at
327Hz then the tiny difference between the two different versions of F#4 is scarcely enough
to be discernible to the listener's ear. What is clearly discernible in practice, however, is the
third partial of this multiphonic which is not notated in the score by Tanada but is sonically
present in the multiphonic. It is possible to suppress this partial using a subtle amount of
the subtone technique but there is a danger of lowering the pitch of the important F#4
which is the lowest partial. As this multiphonic is very flexible the player can choose a
number of tongue positions to adopt to get the multiphonic to sound, but it is the 'who'd'
tongue position which is most effective in suppressing this top partial which is written in
both Kientzy and Weiss & Netti's books as a C5 three quarter tones sharp, but is not present
in Londeix's book or indeed in Tanada's score. As with the first group of multiphonics
described above it is necessary to adjust the jaw to achieve the desired tuning from this
multiphonic and so the jaw is again to be dropped away in this case to suppress the top
partial and present the specific interval that is written in the score. The final multiphonic
that Tanada calls for occurs on page three of the score immediately after multiphonic
number 46 as can be seen in figure 4.1.20. Unlike the other multiphonics used
so far this multiphonic is a type A multiphonic which Weiss and Netti describe as a 'layer of
natural overtones over a fundamental' (Weiss & Netti, 2010 p.60). With this type of
multiphonic the tongue position is of utmost importance as the fingering is that used for the
normal fundamental, in this case the fingering for G5. With this type of multiphonic the
saxophonist must be able to pitch the top partial and imagine they are singing this note,
thus 'tuning the vocal tract' as discussed in (Chen, Smith, & Wolfe, 2008). There are two
tongue positions for this fingering which result in two slightly different multiphonic
151
resonances; the first is the 'who'd' position which results in both G4 and G5 being sounded
simultaneously (effectively 'splitting' the note into its fundamental and first partial); and the
second tongue position is the 'heed' position which results in the sounding of the notated G4
and D6 but also in a G5 that is not present in the score. Each of these tongue positions has
its problems: the first omits the D6 whilst the second includes a G5 and thus introduces a
more complex sounding multiphonic overall. Within the context of this piece, and with
multiphonic number 46 preceding this multiphonic, the second tongue position which sounds
the D6 is the most appropriate as Tanada has specified this interval of a twelfth following
the interval of a minor ninth, the first instance in the piece of an interval augmenting
instead of diminishing.
Flutter tongue
This effect is used throughout Tanada's piece often in conjunction with other effects so as to
add an extra timbral disturbance to a phrase which already has the impression of
deterioration. As has been mentioned, the two methods of flutter tongue are the use of the
tongue against the soft palate (as in a Spanish rolled 'r') and the undulation of the epiglottis
against the back of the throat. The first main occurrence of this is on page three of the
score where this technique is used alongside the previously discussed vocalisation during a
descending semiquaver passage as previously shown in figure 4.1.9. Due to the fortissimo
dynamic and the presence of the voice producing heterodyne components, the method of
using the tongue against the hard palate for this passage creates a solid and clearly audible
disturbance of the air column whereas the undulation of the epiglottis against the soft
palate creates a softer effect which is less easily heard amongst the surrounding complex
sounds. Similarly at the climax of the section on page six the tongue flutter technique can
be used at a louder dynamic in order to be audible over this quick and loud succession of
notes. The less harsh flutter tongue effect can be used to advantage in the quieter phrases
of the piece as demonstrated by the passage on lines five and six of page seven where the
subtone would be destroyed by the presence of a harsh flutter tongue as shown in figure
152
4.3.21. The throat flutter is appropriate here so that the trilled notes are heard over the
percussive flutter tongue effect, which is especially important when there is air sound in the
pitches.
The end of the piece also calls for use of the throat flutter as the phrase diminuendos and
the sound becomes 'more and more breathy and colourless' until the phrase eventually dies
away, and the use of the tongue here would be very audible and overpower the pitches of
the trills effectively destroying both the breathiness and the tonality of the final phrase of
the composition.
Slap Tongue
Tanada uses slap tongue only once in Mysterious Morning III but the placement of this
single effect is important as it begins an interlude of extremes of both dynamic and register
in amongst two sections that are by contrast at an extremely low dynamic level as shown in
figure 4.1.22. The slap effect is written as a normal Bb3 but with the word 'slap' written
above it; this suggests that the slap should be pitched to this note to begin the section and
it should not be a secco slap as described in Weiss & Netti. This is performed by playing a
regular Bb3 with a very heavily articulated tongue slap at its beginning sounding both the
percussive slap effect and the pitch, which will maintain the overall rhythm of the phrase by
fully sounding the first note of the rhythmic group.
153
Section 2
Nicolaus A. Huber Aus Schmerz und Trauer (1982) For Alto
Saxophone
In his article on Huber's music printed in Tempo John Warnaby writes 'Ultimately, Huber’s
music avoids undue sophistication. It is not primarily concerned with experimentation,
involving the deconstruction of instrumental and vocal sonorities by means of extended
techniques, nor is it underpinned by complex philosophical ideas. Its main challenge stems
from the vehemence of its expressive language, and the differing perspectives Huber
achieves by means of varying degrees of distortion' (Warnaby, 2003 p.37). This clarifies
Huber's use of extended techniques not as a means of deconstruction of either tone or
material, as we saw in Tanada's Mysterious Morning III (1996), but instead as a necessary
extension of Huber's own compositional language. Huber was influenced by experimentalism
and his compositions take elements from Berg and Nono (Warnaby, 2003 pp.23-28) in his
use of rhythm and secret codes written into repeated tones, and his use of extended
techniques in instrumental works are used not to destroy the sound but to push performers
'to the point of exhaustion' (Warnaby, 2003 pp.23-28). Warnaby goes on to observe that
'many of Huber’s solo instrumental pieces... are usually designed to transcend mere
interpretation, to the point where the performer’s inner humanity is revealed' (Warnaby,
2003 pp.23-28) which accounts for the variation of sound techniques that use the
performers' own physiological makeup to identify one performance from another such as the
use of whistling ('pfeifen') and the formation of vowels whilst playing utilising the
performers' own vocal tract resonances for fundamental tones.
One of the most identifiable compositional techniques employed by Huber is his theory of
conceptual rhythm composition, where taking cues from world music (Huber, 2000 p.575)
and the experiments of crowd chants in Bertold Brecht's non-rhyming improvised crowd
poetry with irregular rhythm (Huber, 2000 trans. 2008 p.575) which utilises in the
composition a 'range of tempo, with fluid and unclear limits at both sides, is appropriate to
an active body rhythm. Superheating or sub-cooling respectively, the simple extraction of
154
the rhythmical shaping from the muscular active time frame could be applied as phenomena
influencing and regulating each other, from a physically imperceptible pace, “too much” or
“too fast” respectively, towards the quasi-timeless expression of the mere inner, spiritual,
poetical, atmospheric or similar' (Huber, 2000 trans. 2008 p.574). This 'range of tempo' is
used by Huber as a dramatic tool and Huber himself observes that once an accelerando has
culminated 'one has reached the border of ecstasy and mania' just as is experienced in
African drumming cultures (Huber, 2000 trans. 2008 p.574).
Altissimo
Huber's use of the highest register of the saxophone generally follows the theory outlined by
his conceptional rhythm composition method, which uses tempo and in Aus Schmerz und
Trauer (1982) pitch in order to control the dramatic narrative of the composition. Huber
does this by using scales across the whole range of the instrument to highlight narrative
denouements usually toward the end of a section, the first of which appearing on page five
of the score with an ascending scale into the altissimo register growing out of a rhythmic
multiphonic phrase. By using this register in this way the composer covers much of the
saxophone's register in a short amount of time resulting in the player's need to familiarise
themselves with the tongue positions and fingerings which are most efficient to pitch the
notes of the altissimo register with fluidity. Figure 4.2.1 shows the first instance of a
chromatic scale into the altissimo register starting on written A6 and finishing at D7 (track
69).
The standard fingering for this register as taken from Rousseau's book suggests a variation
on the standard chromatic fingering for C6 to F6 using the 'overblowing a sixth' method
Rousseau suggests as discussed previously. This means that the already familiar chromatic
155
fingerings on the palm keys of the instrument can be fingered with a new tongue position to
pitch the notes of the altissimo register. When it comes to playing D7, however, the tongue
needs to be re-set as the chromatic fingering to F# has been exhausted on the palm keys
and so must start again from the fingering for C#6 but this time overblown by a ninth to
pitch the correct note. The first tongue position on these palm key fingerings requires the
'head' tongue position in order to pitch the chromatic scale from A#6 to D7, but then the
saxophonist must change to the 'heed' or 'hid' tongue position to reach the new partial. This
is the same for the passage which begins on page six and continues on page seven, which
is also an ascending scale into the altissimo register, however, as the scale does not reach
the D7 there is no need to change tongue position during this passage, maintaining the
'head' tongue position throughout. It is worth noting, however, that the tongue positions to
be adopted are merely indications of how the player needs to tune their vocal tract (as if
singing the note) in order for the note to sound. A combination of air, fingerings and tongue
position is not sufficient to switch partials in this register without further manipulation of the
larynx which is achieved by imagining singing the note alongside the elements listed. The
altissimo register is used differently in other parts of the work where the composer has
decided to intersperse notes from this register into a melodic line by way of contrasting both
the shape of the line and the timbre of this register. Figure 4.2.2 shows the 'aggressiv'
section at the top of page ten of the score during which Huber identifies and exploits four
main registers of the instrument: the first register uses the note C4; the second uses G4;
the third moves between E5, F#5 and A5; and the final register is the altissimo pitch G#6.
In order to pitch this altissimo note accurately the saxophonist again must pre-empt the
tongue position needed in order to secure its production, a tongue position which differs
from the other notes of the phrase (track 70).
156
Fig.4.2.2 Nicolaus A. Huber Aus Schmerz und Trauer (1982) page 10 lines 1-2
Harmonics
Huber includes a glissando through the harmonics near the end of the piece, again
emphasising the connection between extremes of range and dramatic tension. Figure 4.2.3
shows the notation for the glissando plus the performance directions written alongside it
which informs the performer to filter away the lower partial ('Tiefen mit Lippendruck
wegfiltern'), to re-enforce the high overtones ('Oberton-Höhen verstärken') and finally to be
left with only the overtones ('nur noch obertonfeld').
This effect is once again achieved through use of the different tongue positions from the
normal position 'hawed' through 'hood', 'Who'd', 'head', 'hid' and finally to 'heed' in order to
pitch the very highest partials (track 7). In this way it is possible to pitch as high as the
thirteenth partial (G8) which can then be manipulated with the tongue from 'heed' to 'hid' to
realise Huber's ascending and descending effect. It is worth noting that the tongue position
of 'heed' needed to reach the unusually high thirteenth partial is very similar to the tongue
position need to reach D7 on the soprano saxophone in Tanada's Mysterious Morning III
(1996) in that the tongue has to withdraw toward the back of the oral cavity creating
157
tension in the neck muscles and tendons. The concert pitch for both of these notes is
around a concert C7, giving some credibility to Rob Buckland's claim that tongue position
depends on the concert pitch note the player is tuning their vocal tract to regardless of
which size of saxophone one is playing on.
Multiphonics
Huber utilises multiphonics in two main ways; firstly he uses triadic multiphonics at the end
of sections within the composition which are marked 'so lange und bis so leise wie möglich'
(as long and as quiet as possible) with a maximum duration given in seconds. The second
group of multiphonics Huber uses are dyads which interject within a melodic phrase, and
therefore relate closely to the pitches immediately surrounding them. It is the relationships
between the multiphonics in each group that allow us to decide which pitch relationships are
the most significant
Figure 4.2.4 shows each triad multiphonic in the order that they appear in the piece, these
multiphonics can be heard in sequence on track 71. The upper notes of the first two
multiphonics in figure 4.2.3 ascend from Bb5 to Fb6, and then the third and fourth
multiphonic's upper notes descend from G6 to C6 giving a rising diminished fifth and then a
falling perfect fifth. The lower notes of each pair of multiphonics follow a similar
Fig.4.2.4 Triad multiphonics in order of appearance in Aus Schmerz und Trauer (1982)
ascending/descending pattern; the first pair rising by a diminished fifth and the second pair
descending a diminished fourth. The middle notes of each pair of multiphonics follow in
parallel with the first pair of notes ascending by a major third and the second pair
descending by a minor third. This ascent followed by descent represents the piece as a
whole and is concurrent with Huber's conceptual rhythm composition technique in that the
pitch rises to 'superheat' the dramatic tension which then 'sub-cools' when the pitch
158
descends. In order to maintain the harmonic relationships between these multiphonics the
saxophonist must pitch the top note of each multiphonic to ensure it sounding at the correct
pitch. If the multiphonics are sounded from the lowest fundamental to the highest there is a
danger that the highest note will not be sounded properly being that it is the last to be
produced in these type B multiphonics. This method of production ensures the pitch
relations within each multiphonic pair as the lower partials will sound as a result of pitching
the highest ones.
The second group of dyad multiphonics, which intersect a melodic line, have their own
individual relationships with the music around them. The first of these type C multiphonics
is based around a C#5 and a C#6, which connects to the surrounding pitches in two ways:
the preceding D#5 falls to the C#5 of the multiphonic whilst at the same time the C#6 is
sounded which then falls to a B5 (see figure 4.2.5). The dual purpose nature of this
multiphonic means that both partials need to be sounded as strongly as the other and so
the player needs to pitch the highest partial whilst relaxing the lower jaw slightly allowing
the lower fundamental to sound; I have also found that as this multiphonic is based upon a
modified C4 fingering the notes produced are significantly flatter than C# sounding closer to
a C natural. The addition of the octave key adds a vent to this fingering that raises the pitch
sufficiently for it to be identified as a C# by the ear. The second dyad to employ this type of
multiphonic voice-leading is depicted in figure 4.2.6, where the G5 leads to a G#5 after an
increase of both speed and dynamic. This multiphonic is achieved again with the fingering
or Kientzy multiphonic number 67 but ensuring that the C#5 that is present in the sound is
159
suppressed by pitching the vocal tract to the G5 and using a slight amount of relaxed jaw
pressure to ensure the top partial does not sound. The final dyad Huber uses is a type D
multiphonic which is an aggregate of two or more partials over a fundamental (Weiss and
Netti, 2010) and comes seemingly in isolation from the music that surrounds it as shown in
figure 4.2.7. Here Huber attaches the multiphonic to the preceding phrase connecting the
two by their dynamic, and so whereas the E5 of the multiphonic is a minor third higher than
the C#5 in the previous pianissimo phrase, the D4 is also a minor third lower than the F#4
from the previous fortissimo phrase. As the interval of a minor third is significant in this
passage the E5 or lower partial of the multiphonic is the note that is to be emphasised;
however, this is counter-intuitive with this type of multiphonic as the higher partial needs to
be pitched in order to achieve the multiphonic at all; the lower partials are sounded by
drawing the lip back and downwards effectively 'splitting' the note and sounding the
partials.
As stated these are the main ways Huber uses multiphonics in the work, however, a type B
multiphonic is also given a third role as it is used to emphasise a repeated rhythm in the
work that the listener has heard previously. It is therefore the rhythm and articulation of
this multiphonic that is to be given importance in performance as it needs to match the
previous material. As this multiphonic is a stable one, the tongue can be used as normal in
order to articulate the rhythm in a comparable way to the monophonic version which occurs
earlier in the work, as long as the 'who'd' tongue position is maintained throughout.
160
Timbral Fingerings
A large amount of the second section of the piece includes Huber's specific rhythms that
characterise his conceptual rhythm composition technique, and these rhythms are
performed using timbral fingerings which are numbered from 1 to 6. Huber tells us at the
beginning of the score that these numbers represent 'alternate fingerings for a tone. The
higher the number, the more the tone colour should vary from the “normal fingering”, i.e. it
should become increasingly darker.' Huber is using the mechanics of the instrument to
highlight the respective tone qualities between dark and light, much like Scelsi's direction
for 'chiaro' (dark) and 'cupo' (clear) pitches that appear in Maknongan (1986) which was to
come four years later. Figure 4.2.8 shows the fingering chart from Weiss & Netti (2010)
showing the alternate fingerings for the note C5 on the alto saxophone, these fingerings are
organised from the standard pitch to the left, to just below the pitch (second fingering) and
Fig.4.2.8 alternate fingering chart for C5 taken from Weiss & Netti (2010)
on to the fingering that is the brightest in pitch to the extreme right. This is problematic in
that the composer has asked for a succession of alternative fingering which should 'become
increasingly darker' varying downward from the normal fingering. Weiss & Netti's suggested
fingerings takes us in the opposite dirtection ascending upwards from the normal fingering.
Table 22 shows the frequencies in Hz that result from Weiss & Netti's suggestions.
Table 22: Resultant alternate fingerings frequencies from Weiss & Netti (2010)
Fingering 1 (normal) 2 (trill) 3 4 5 6 7

Frequency 311Hz 309Hz 312Hz 313Hz 315Hz 318Hz 319Hz
Only the second fingering in the table above is lower in pitch than the normal fingering and
so more fingering combination are to be explored in order to flatten or 'darken' the sound.
Figure 4.2.8 shows Londeix's fingering suggestions for bisbigliato and their resultant
161
frequency which, with the exclusion of the ± trill indication, can be used as alternate
fingerings for the note C5.
Table 23: Resultant alternate fingerings frequencies from Londeix (1989)
Fingering (normal) 1 2 3 4 5
Frequency 311Hz 310Hz 306Hz 307Hz 319Hz 313Hz
This fingering system still only presents three fingerings that are lower in pitch than the
normal frequency of 311Hz, but by mixing the two fingering systems a succession of
alternate fingerings can be achieved which begin slightly higher than normal pitch (313Hz)
and then become progressively 'darker'. Table 24 represents a potential suggestion of the
necessary fingering choices to realise the passage from Huber's composition by showing
which fingering system will provide a successively lower pitch for the appropriate number
stipulated by Huber in the score.
Table 24: Suggested fingerings for alternative fingerings as taken from a mixture of Weiss & Netti's and Londeix's
fingering systems
Huber 1 2 3 4 5 6
number
(from the
score)
Fingering Weiss & Weiss & Londeix 1 Weiss & Londeix 3 Londeix 2
Netti 4 Netti 3 Netti 2
Pitch 313Hz 312Hz 310Hz 309Hz 307Hz 306Hz
By using this system the passage of rhythmic pitch alterations can be performed as Huber
intended which is to have a sound which gets progressively darker in sound from number 1
to number 8 as shown in figure 4.2.9 (track 72).
162
It has already been said that Huber wished to reach a point where the 'performer’s inner
humanity is revealed' (Warnaby, 2003) through un-conventional performance techniques
and the exploitation of a performer's own physical makeup to ensure each performance is
slightly different depending on the player. In this way the composer hopes to 'transcend
mere interpretation' by presenting certain techniques which will be sounded differently by
each player. The first such technique related to embouchure involves the movement of the
lip on the reed to create, as the composer puts it, a 'lip glissando from the rear of the reed
and back. However, a pitch glissando should be avoided' (Huber, 1982). In doing this
movement the saxophonist is placing their lip in the middle of the reed constricting its
vibration and therefore allowing only a certain portion of the reed to vibrate. This creates a
disturbance in the timbre of the pitch which woodwind players refer to as 'splitting' the note,
as various partials tend to sound when the reed is constricted in this way. By rolling the lip
forward so that it retains contact with the reed the player is able to keep contact with the
reed throughout the gesture resulting in a rhythmically controllable sound which affects the
timbre of the pitch but not the pitch itself. As this is not an established technique, each
saxophonist will perform this differently depending on the mouthpiece and reed combination
the player chooses to use. To demonstrate this, I have used the SPEAR spectrum analyser
to measure the difference in timbre between two different mouthpieces whilst performing
this 'split' tone as depicted in figure 4.2.10. The resultant sounds can be heard on tracks 73
(Vandoren) and 74 (Freddie Gregory) of the accompanying CD.
Figure 4.2.10 shows the two different mouthpieces producing very similar results; however,
the Freddie Gregory mouthpiece produces more upper partials in the sound and therefore a
brighter sound than the Vandoren AL3, this is subtly evident in listening to the sound of the
technique as demonstrated on the accompanying CD.
163
Fig.4.2.10 SPEAR analysis of two different mouthpieces performing the C# timbre gliss, the left is a Vandoren AL3
and the right is a Freddie Gregory F6.
The second type of embouchure technique Huber employs is a type of articulation which
varies the timbre of the notes according to the performers' own way of pronouncing certain
vowel shapes. Figure 4.2.11 shows a passage from page nine of Aus Schmerz und Trauer
(1982) which stipulates that the saxophonist should produce pitches using specific
articulations, mostly beginning with the breath and ending with a specific tongue attack.
These articulations work best if they are produced literally with the tongue articulating
against the hard palate which means moving the tongue from its normal position beneath
164
the mouthpiece to a position above the mouthpiece normally reserved for the tongue flutter
technique. This tongue displacement makes the distinction between the vowels that end in
'd' where the tongue is above the mouthpiece, and the vowels that end in 't' where the
tongue is in the normal playing position.
The final timbral variation that Huber asks for that affects the embouchure is for three
different type of 'luftgeräusch' or air sound: Low ('tief') middle ('mittel') and high ('hoch') as
shown in figure 4.2.12. In order to sound three distinct timbres for this air sound the
embouchure must be changed so that the pressure around the reed is either high or low
depending on whether the player has the mouthpiece in their mouth or not. The low air
sound is simply achieved by relaxing the normal embouchure so that air is still directed
down the instrument, and the air seal is tight around the mouthpiece, but there is not
sufficient pressure on the reed to elicit a vibration from the reed. The middle air timbre
involves opening the seal around the mouthpiece by dropping the jaw but maintaining the
lower lip contact with the reed, in this way the air can travel over the top of the mouthpiece
as well as over the reed and therefore into the bore of the saxophone. The light air sound is
a variation of the middle embouchure technique whereby the jaw is lowered in a similar
way; however, for this sound the saxophonist is to direct the air directly into the reed at a
high velocity using the 'hid' tongue position (as if one is pronouncing a hard 'sss' sound or
hiss). If these three embouchure techniques are used in conjunction with each specific
fingering, then it is possible to sound different air timbres on the same note as the
composer requires in this passage (track 75).
165
Circular Breathing
As Warnaby explained in his article, one of Huber's interests is the idea of pushing
performers to 'the point of exhaustion' (Warnaby, 2003). On page six of the score the
saxophonist is asked to create a continuous a passage of semiquavers, which are repeated,
out of which the next phrase grows with crotchets appearing to interrupt the flow of the
music. This transformation from semiquavers to crotchets is systematic and is to be played
over a great deal of time, Huber stipulates that the first crotchet should not appear until 20
to 30 seconds of unbroken semiquavers. Huber writes in the score the direction 'das modell
standig wiederholend in die rhythmus-form der nachsten stufe ubergehen' ('the model
constantly repeats in the rhythmic form whilst carrying onto the next step'). This puts the
performer in a position where they must use circular breathing throughout this semiquaver
passage otherwise the music will be abruptly interrupted. During a passage like this the
slight dip in pitch which is often heard whilst circular breathing due to the change from
storing air in the cheeks to breathing in through the nose is hidden as it cannot be heard
amidst the flow of notes. Using circular breathing will not push the performer to an
exhaustion point but will maintain the melodic line, as Huber wishes, and so to keep the
rhythmical intensity which will be continued in the following bars by an ascending scale into
the altissimo register, and so circular breathing should be used here.
Section 3
Betsy Jolas Épisode Quatrième (1983) For Tenor Saxophone
The performance note for Jolas's piece reads as follows: 'This piece, completed in
September 1983, is the fourth in a series with the same title intended for a solo instrument.
It may be observed that the piece calls for a member of the large saxophone family that is
curiously little used outside the field of jazz. Thus the work clearly falls in line with the
research taken at the time in “Points d'or” for one saxophonist playing 4 saxophones. In
short, the present piece is designed to offer a step-by-step exploration of the entire register
of this fine instrument with an almost systematic outward and return journey' (Jolas, 1983).
The latter part of this note is of most interest when considering the extended techniques
used throughout the work, as the 'step-by-step exploration' allows us to approach each
166
technique as a new sound and ability of the instrument, aided by Jolas' composition which
she herself describes as 'systematic'.
Pitch Techniques – Harmonics

It has been mentioned that extracting harmonics from the larger saxophones is much easier
than on smaller models as the wavelengths of the harmonics have quite a low frequency,
allowing more opportunities for nuance in the tongue and throat positioning. This is a fact
that Jolas seems to have exploited in her composition as manipulation of the harmonics are
featured throughout the work. The first occurrence of this technique is shown in figure 4.3.1
(track 76), where Jolas notates the harmonic G6 to be played as the fifth partial of the
fundamental of C4, which is the preceding pitch in the phrase. Jolas has therefore stipulated
that the performer should play the high G as the fifth partial of C, and so a specific tongue
and throat position will need to be learned to achieve this effect smoothly. For this partial
the 'Hod' tongue position (as explained in chapter 2) works alongside the widening of the
larynx: this combination is often thought of as bringing the tongue 'backwards' in the mouth
and raising it towards the soft palate. There is a very high level of specificity in this tongue
position: if the tongue slips even a millimetre too high towards the soft palate, the
performer will over-blow to the fifth partial and sound a G6, whereas if the tongue is not
high enough, the third partial C6 will be heard. It is to this level of specificity that Rob
Buckland refers in the previous chapter by stating that 'the recall is just so demanding to
remember... This is what composers forget.' Whereas the level of recall needed for these
techniques is indeed demanding, I believe it is this 'systematic journey' of discovery
167
throughout the instrument's compass that the composer wishes to harness. Jolas enhances
the sense of exploration by adding a second effect whilst pitching the harmonics the next
time they are heard, as shown in figure 4.3.2 (track 77). Here, a harmonic of G#5 is
notated, which is the second partial of the C#4 fundamental. However, Jolas denotes that
the fundamental should sound at intervals whilst the harmonic is being sustained. In this
case, the tongue position to pitch the harmonic is more toward the 'heed' tongue position,
with a thicker amount of tongue toward the back of the oral cavity. Once the note has been
pitched, this tongue position is then alternated with the normal playing position of 'hawed'
and thus the effect is created. It is tempting whilst doing this to lower the jaw in order to
expose more reed to the air stream and thus help the fundamental to sound; however,
doing this is a risk. The player would need to re-pitch the harmonic using the tongue at the
same time as exposing more lip to the reed in order to sound the partial, which would
greatly increase the amount of recall, as well as any margin for error. It is much more
accurate to move the tongue only in this instance, which helps to sustain this tricky partial
throughout the gesture albeit creating more work for the tongue. This gesture is
immediately followed by another harmonic of E6, which this time is the third partial of the
note A4 produced through the 'heed' tongue and throat position (as shown in figure 4.3.3,
track 78). The final use of this technique is shown in figure 4.3.4 (track 79), where we find
similar sustained harmonics with the fundamentals sounding at intervals.The difficulty in
sustaining the sound here is that the composer calls for different partials to be sounded
168
per gesture, and therefore, the tongue positions alter with each one. The first and third
gestures at this point are simply the first partial of the fundamentals D4 and E4
respectively, for which the 'who'd' tongue position is used to over-blow at the octave.
However, the gesture that comes between them is again the second partial of C#4, and as
we have already seen, this partial uses the 'heed' tongue position making for quick
movement on the part of the saxophonist between one and the other. Again it is important
for the player not to drop the jaw whilst making the transfer from one partial to the other as
this will sound the stronger sounds (the first partial and the fundamental) over the weaker
second partial. In each case, the player is required to recall these specific tongue and throat
positions with speed and accuracy in order for the partial to sound smoothly whilst the
fundamental is being sounded (giving the illusion of two simultaneous sounds), and for the
harmonics to fit seamlessly into the surrounding musical phrase.
Microtones
Jolas's use of microtones in every instance of their occurrence juxtaposes the note with
their tempered counterpart, thus highlighting the microtonal nature of the phrase. With one
169
exception (which we shall discuss later) each microtone centres around the note F4 or F5,
which Jolas uses as the point from which she begins her 'outward and return journey' of
exploration through the instrument's capabilities. The first appearance of microtones occurs
on the fourth line of the first page where an earlier phrase of Gb4 (164Hz) descending to F4
(155Hz) is diminished by a quarter tone becoming F4 quarter toner tone sharp descending
to an E4 quarter tone sharp. After consulting Londiex (1989) and Weiss & Netti (2010), both
texts agree that the fingering for the E quarter tone sharp is 123-46, with the Weiss &
Fig.4.3.5 Fingering suggestions for the note E4 quartertone sharp as taken from Weiss & Netti (2010) and Londeix
(1989)
Netti text adding the C# key (see figure 4.3.5), sharpening the sound by a tiny and largely
inaudible fraction with my equipment. However, the two texts disagree on the fingering for F
quarter tone sharp; Londiex suggests 123-56 plus the low B key, and Weiss & Netti suggest
123-56 plus the low C and Bb keys as shown in figure 4.3.6. In both cases the fingering on
the body of the instrument is the same; however, the additional keys differ, resulting in the
Londiex sounding at 163Hz, and the Weiss & Netti sounding at 162Hz. When playing
Londiex's suggestion it is quickly apparent that other notes want to sound with this
fingering, and after consulting Kientzy (2003) it is evident that this fingering is very close to
Kientzy multiphonic number 77, which has the addition of the low C key as well as this
same core fingering (see figure 4.3.7). This multiphonic does indeed include an F4 quarter
tone sharp but also the F5 three quarter tones sharp and the C#6, and when playing this
Fig.4.3.6 Fingering suggestions for the note F4 quartertone sharp as taken from Weiss & Netti (2010) and Londeix
(1989)
170
fingering, the saxophonist needs to add a certain amount of subtone to the sound in order
to suppress the partials of the multiphonic which are trying to sound. The Weiss & Netti
fingering alleviates this problem through the addition of the low Bb key which stops the
multiphonic from sounding. The addition of the low C key flattens the sound from 165Hz to
164Hz and thereby differentiates it from an F4 three quarter tones flat making this fingering
both accurate and stable. The second appearance of a quarter tone around the note of F4 is
on the second page where the pitch G4 quarter tone flat descends to an F#4. In this case
both texts agree that the fingering for this note is 123-5 with the addition of the F# trill
key; this sharpens the F# from 329Hz to 340Hz, falling short of a G by 9Hz, and appears to
be the only option available for this note.
Fig.4.3.7 Kientzy multiphonic number 77 as taken from Les Sons Multiples Aux Saxophones (2003)
The third and final quarter tone in the piece is an A5 three quartertones sharp, descending
to A5. Again both texts agree on the fingering of bis plus the side Bb trill key, however I
have found that the addition of the third finger to this fingering raises the pitch slightly from
424Hz to 426Hz, with the next eighth tone of B5 a quartertone flat sounding at 430Hz and
the B natural (concert A) sounding at 440Hz. With the addition of this third finger I can
choose to make the sonic gap between the A5 three quartertone sharp and the A5 even
wider increasing the interval and thus highlighting the microtonal character of the phrase.
Multiphonics
It has already been mentioned that the main tone this piece expands from and retracts to is
F4. To emphasise this sense of a return 'journey', Jolas's first multiphonic is based around
this same tone. This multiphonic is derived from a mixture of Kientzy multiphonic numbers
37 and 38, which have the same fingerings but number 38 has the octave key added as
denoted in the score's fingerings (see figure 4.3.8) . Interestingly Kientzy number
171
37,which does not have the octave key, corresponds closer to the score's notation than
number 38 does, which has the correct fingering but different notation according to Kientzy.
It is due to this that I have chosen fingering number 38 as is denoted in the score. It is also
interesting to note that different tongue positions, and how much lip is exposed to the reed,
Fig.4.3.8 Kientzy multiphonic numbers 37 and 38 as taken from Les Sons Multiples Aux Saxophones (2003)
effect how the multiphonic sounds. Kientzy number 38 sounds easily when blown using the
normal 'hawd' tongue position, however, I have found that if the tongue is raised toward the
soft palate, the upper partials of this multiphonic are more audible. This accentuation of the
upper partials is in keeping with the composer's wish for an 'exploration of the entire
register' from the nucleus of the note F4, therefore this multiphonic could be seen as a
representation of the entire piece in miniature. The 'heed' tongue position accentuates the
upper partials of this multiphonic whilst still sustaining the F4 achieving the desired effect at
this point in the work.
The next group of multiphonics Jolas uses are type E narrow dyads marked 'sons fantômes'
or 'ghost' sounds as shown in figure 4.3.9 (track 80), the name of which acts as a clue to
their production and resultant sound.
172
Not all of the fingerings for these dyads are represented in the usual reference materials but
they do appear to be variations of existing multiphonics. The first multiphonic in the phrase
is a variation on Kientzy number 67 (figure 4.3.10), which is notated a quartertone sharper
Fig.4.3.10 Kientzy multiphonic numbers 67 as taken from Les Sons Multiples Aux Saxophones (2003)
than the notes written in the score; this is due to the addition of keys 5, 6 and 7, which
serve to sharpen the dyad. Kientzy notes in his description of this multiphonic that it
produces an airy sound, which is true in that the dyad is only produceable at a very quiet
dynamic level and it is the tipping point between tuned breath and reed vibration that
creates the multiphonic. This tipping point of breath engagement with the reed is
notoriously difficult to find and so a performer will find the use of the 'who'd' tongue position
helpful in aiming for the top note of the dyad. This should allow for just enough breath to
sound the lower of the two notes, which is entirely in keeping with Jolas's 'sons fantômes'
performance direction. The second multiphonic in this phrase corresponds exactly to Kientzy
number 5 (figure 4.3.11) which also includes the symbol denoting the presence
of an airy sound. The 'hood' tongue position is useful in securing this dyad as well as the
dropping of the jaw, which allows the reed to vibrate further along its length thus sounding
the necessary beating patterns for this minor second interval. It is important to play this
multiphonic at an extremely low dynamic level for two main reasons: firstly, because it fits
aesthetically with those sounds around it, contrasting with the forte interjection between the
multiphonics; and secondly, because the movement to the third multiphonic (a variation of
173
Kientzy number 44 shown in figure 4.3.12) from the second relies on the same delicacy of
air to reed engagement. In this instance the addition of
the low C key suppresses the upper partials of the multiphonic and again, the dyad is played
in the 'hood' position with more reed exposed in the mouth to create a very subtle but
audible lower note. By referring to these multiphonics as 'ghost' sounds the composer has,
in my opinion, shown some understanding of their production and the nuance of oral cavity
manipulation involved. The player is therefore able to use the presence of air sound and the
transient nature of these particular dyads to their advantage, creating sonic 'phantoms' at
extremely low dynamic levels.
Timbral Techniques – Trills

Another feature of this piece is the use of what the composer describes as 'Flattement –
timbral trill (rapid change of enharmonic fingerings)'. It is worth noting that the player has
much less choice over 'enharmonic fingerings' than they would if they played other
instruments such as the clarinet, oboe or bassoon, all of which have some alternate
fingering systems for certain notes. This is due to the saxophone's simple design and can
make finding some alternate fingerings difficult, especially on notes lower down the
instrument's bore where fingering alternatives are limited. Therefore the saxophonist relies
on harmonics and vented notes to create the timbre change. The first trill of this type that
occurs in Épisode Quatrième (1983) is displayed in figure 4.3.13 and is on the note B4. As
this note is located toward the top of the saxophone's cone there are options of activating a
lower key to change the timbre of the note; however, due to the fact that the harmonic B4
is created by fingering a low B3 and over-blowing to the first partial, this sudden
engagement of the whole air column inside the tube at a high velocity makes this option
174
unstable and cumbersome, ruling it out as an option. Having eliminated the harmonic, the
only option left is to add lower keys to change the timbre. In doing so, the danger of
sounding a micro-tonal trill instead of a timbral trill is created, so a great deal of care must
be taken in the choice of fingering to avoid this. The fingering for B4 quarter tone flat
suggested in Londiex is shown in figure 4.3.14 and results in a note that sounds at 213Hz,
falling short of the B4 (concert A3 = 220Hz) by 7 Hz. As we are attempting to find alternate
fingerings for the same note in order to achieve a timbre change, rather than a pitch
change, both of these fingerings offer too wide a gap between the micro-tone and the note
being trilled. Likewise, the fingering for B3 quarter tone sharp sounds at 230Hz, a full 10Hz
Fig.4.3.14 Fingering suggestions for the note B4 quartertone flat as taken from Londeix (1989)
sharper than B3 and only 3Hz flatter than C4. There are two easily executable alternative
fingerings which alter the timbre, but not the pitch, of this note; the Bb trill key could be
added to B3, or the third finger could be depressed. As these keys are in a similar place on
the body of the instrument, they both comply with Benade's principle of tone hole lattice
behaviour, acting as a one-finger fork as described in chapter 2. In practice, the first
fingering (addition of Bb trill) produces a frequency of 221Hz, and the second fingering
(addition of third finger) produces a frequency of 218Hz. Similarly in consultation with Weiss
& Netti (2010), there are two fingerings suggested surrounding B4: B4 an eighth-tone flat,
175
which sounds at 215Hz, and B4 an eighth tone sharp, which sounds at 223Hz (see figure
4.3.15).
Fig.4.3.15 Fingering suggestions for the note B4 quartertone flat as taken from Weiss & Netti (2010)
These eighth and quarter tones do not come as close in pitch to Benade's fork fingering
technique. This is why I have chosen the method which produces an alternative to the
standard micro-tonal fingerings giving us pitches that are much closer in frequency to the
target frequency of 220Hz. Between the two fork-fingered alternatives, the former (bis plus
the Bb trill key) is the more desirable. This is because the Bb trill key is situated adjacent to
the Eb trill key, which is used in the previous gesture for the embouchure trill technique (to
be described in the next section) as shown in figure 4.3.16, and so the transition into this
passage will be made easier and quicker. Similarly, the next use of this technique, as shown
in figure 4.3.16, includes the timbral trill on the note Eb5. It is common to use the C3 key to
execute Eb trills and tremolos; however, we arrive at the same problem as before
differentiating between a timbral or microtonal trill.
The written Eb5 has a frequency of 277Hz, yet, to maintain this fingering and add the C3
trill key will give us a frequency of 286Hz, which again is a very audible interval. None of
the fingerings in either Londiex or Weiss & Netti are possible in this case as too much
movement is needed to remove fingers from the Eb and replace them with palm key
176
fingerings; this will make them impracticable for the speed needed for the trill. Therefore, a
fork-fingering will close the low B key (or C key, but the relevant finger needed is in use)
and will result in the desired sound. Instead, a vent could be used by opening the C1 palm
key, which is roughly adjacent to the highest closed tone hole of the fingered Eb. The
forked-fingering produces a frequency of 275Hz and the vented fingering produces a
frequency of 272Hz. Again, with both fingerings producing frequencies close to the target
fingering of 277Hz, it's for practical reasons that the C1 venting solution seems suitable in
this case as the use of this palm key will produce a quick and fluent trill (track 81). The
timbre trills toward the end of the piece (figure 4.3.17) work in similar ways to the timbre
trill on C6, which are attainable through a forked fingering (2-
345) producing a frequency of 464Hz (target frequency 466Hz), and the trill on A4 also
using a two-fingered fork (12-45) resulting in a frequency of 194Hz with a target of 195Hz.
The trill on E5 works slightly differently through the use of a venting and adding the “C3”
key, which produces the frequency 292Hz with a target of 293Hz. All of these timbre trills
have been achieved by either a forked-fingering, remaining consistent with Benade's tone
hole lattice theory, or have used a vent key to produce a second version of the note, which
is very close in frequency to the original.
The last timbre trill of the piece is a trill on G5 (also shown in figure 4.3.17) and here this
method hits a problem: due to the saxophone's design, any right hand finger that is
depressed will close the F# pad, causing the note to sound, and any left hand little finger
key that is depressed will open the G# key, causing the note to sound. This only leaves the
right hand little finger as an option to create a fork-fingering. However, because the pads
that the left hand little finger operates are so far away from the G pad (4 tone holes on the
177
lattice) the resultant change in pitch or timbre is so small that they'd be unsuitable for this
effect. Here we must turn to a third method of production and create a G harmonic to trill
with the G5; this is achieved with the addition of fingers 4, 6 and the low C key. Some
tongue manipulation is needed here as this is the fingering for the multiphonic numbered
118 in Kientzy's book (figure 4.3.18) which is one of the most commonly used and stable
multiphonics attainable on the saxophone and includes the note G5. Therefore, it is possible
to sound this partial on its own by adopting the 'heed' tongue position, which does not
affect the original note, and thus the two notes can be trilled with this new fingering (track
82).
Embouchure Effects
To complement the timbre trills Jolas includes a gesture beginning as a tremolo of a minor
third which then undergoes a descending glissando to become a timbre trill on a lower note
as shown in figure 4.3.19. Jolas describes the technique in her performance directions as
follows: 'Use the side-fingerings for the e - eb trill and progressively drop the jaw until a
timbral trill on B (flattement)' (track 83).
The first time this technique is encountered the glissando finishes at the note B4 and the
tremolo is between the pitches C5 and Eb5, whereas the second time we encounter the
technique, the tremolo is one octave higher and the glissando now descends to A5 through
178
dropping the jaw as shown in figure 4.3.20 (track 84). When executing this technique the
player needs to consider the amount of jaw movement needed to flatten the C6 down to a
B5 using the lip. Jolas is correct in that the jaw lowers with the lips in place to achieve the
effect but in order to create a timbre trill on B4 without splitting the note whilst sustaining
the same fingering, the jaw must lower so much that the mouthpiece is pulled away from
the top teeth, which are normally anchored on the roof of the mouthpiece. This action
creates a very loose seal around the mouthpiece that flattens the pitch sufficiently;
however, it also creates more air sound as the player is creating a version of subtone for
this effect. When the technique is repeated later in the piece it appears one octave higher
and descends to an A5. In this register, as partials are sounding instead of fundamentals, a
different approach can be taken to this technique by using high to low tongue positions to
glissando the pitch downwards. To do this the player begins in the 'heed' tongue position
and gradually moves through 'head', 'hood' and finally to the 'hod' position as well as
dropping the jaw as the composer suggests. This final position should pitch a minor third
lower (C6 to A5 as shown in figure 4.3.20) and since we are pitching a partial now using
specific tongue positions the trill key becomes a vent giving us our timbre trill.
Duration Techniques – Slap Tongue With Key Percussion

Jolas's use of slap tongue throughout the piece is often at high amplitudes in order to
accentuate a dynamic change from forte to piano. This is certainly the case at the beginning
and end of the work where slap tongue is used as shown in figure 4.3.21. Elsewhere in the
179
piece, slap tongue is often used alongside key percussion to give the effect of a timbral
crescendo including an increase in dynamic. Figure 4.3.22 shows this technique where the
articulation moves from key percussion to slap tongue and finally to normal articulation in
line with the dynamic crescendo (track 85). In figure 4.3.23 the reverse of this occurs: slap
tongue followed by key percussion following the contours of a diminuendo (track 86). To
create this timbral dynamic shift, the performer can easily change from one technique to
the other. However, to maintain the pitching effect of the key percussion, the saxophonist
needs to close the saxophone's tube by pushing the reed closed with the tongue as
described previously. This will add pressure at one end of the instrument and create a
standing wave inside the instrument, thus exploiting the full resonance of the instruments'
bore. This technique is also advantageous as the performer's tongue is against the reed
ready to perform the slap tongue technique.
180
Circular Breathing
Jolas stipulates at the beginning of the score that the performer should employ the use of
'respiration circulaire' for the whole of the opening section. The performer therefore, needs
to be careful as to where the breath should be taken through the nose so as not to disturb
the sustained F4 that is a feature of this work. There are clues in the score as to possible
places to switch breath support from the lungs to the cheeks, and these tend to be when
the dynamic level drops to extreme levels such as ppp or al niente, as shown in figure
4.3.24. To accentuate this extreme dynamic the use of subtle subtone is advantageous not
only to push the dynamic to the edge of sound production by restricting the reed's vibration
with the lip, but also to suppress any partials that may wish to sound whilst altering the
embouchure through circular breathing (a side-effect of releasing the pressure of the
embouchure whilst circular breathing that in practice can be difficult to control). It is also
advantageous to choose breathing places around trills and quick moving notes to disguise
any slight dips in pitch.
It is common for the first partial to be stronger during this transition of breath from lungs to
the cheeks, and so, when playing harmonics in the piece, the saxophonist can elect to
transfer breath at points where this partial is sounded. The composer has provided some
clues through the use of comma breath marks, indicating where the fundamental should
stop sounding (see figure 4.3.25), and so the performer can use these as reliable places for
the transfer.
181
Section 4
Ichirô Nodaïra Arabesque III (1983) For Alto Saxophone and Piano
Jerome Rosen writes that 'Nodaïra's music may be far-out, but it is by no means gimmicky.
He has found a musical language appropriate to the untraditional use he makes of his
instruments. The piece moves along in clear and consistent fashion to create an elegant,
convincing form' (Rosen, 1984). It is the creation of a musical language that represents a
non-gimmicky approach to the use of extended technique which is the focus of Nodaïra's
Arabesque series.
The composer states in the liner notes of Claude Delangle's recording entitled The Japanese
Saxophone (1998) that:
As the title suggests, the piece does not possess a rigid structure but is an
arabesque of different colours which overlap. To this end I have used a very
extended range of sound elements, from raw sound to normal playing, both
from the saxophone and from the piano. A careful balance is struck between
two types of structure: a complex structure, the elements of which are relatively
simple and can be analysed by the listener, and a rather simple structure which
contains acoustically complex sound elements. These two structures are
continually interchanged, and determine the micro-form of the piece
(Nodaïra, 1998)
This straightforward organisation of material allows the performer to prepare the extended
techniques in the piece with an idea to their purpose: the transformation of simple lines into
complex sounds. It is therefore possible to prepare quarter tones and multiphonic gestures
in such a way as to highlight the complex nature of the resultant sound, especially in
relation to the piano, which acts as a harmonic 'yardstick' by which the microtonal
techniques of the saxophone are highlighted.
182
Altissimo
The altissimo register is mostly used in Nodaïra's piece during the simpler material in order
to highlight the sonic difference between the saxophone's registers. The first instance of
altissimo playing is marked 'dans la résonance des accords du piano' indicating that the
tones of the saxophone are to be played as a backdrop to the piano's chords, and so the
skill of pitching these notes through use of vocal tract manipulation is of great importance in
order to sound these pitches at such a low volume (figure 4.4.1). This style of playing relies
heavily on vocal tract tuning in order to avoid a portamento effect as the player moves the
tongue to the appropriate position, and so the 'heed' tongue position needs to be adopted
immediately in order to avoid this unwanted phenomenon. The final section of the piece
uses this register extensively alongside multiphonics which also include partials above the
normal compass of the instrument. This means that the altissimo register is being used as
one of Nodaïra's 'complex sound elements' alongside multiphonics in order to juxtapose the
two with interjections from the piano in between the saxophone's line, creating a trio of
sound elements. This final section is also the only section in which Nodaïra uses microtones
in the altissimo register, and the composer supplies his own fingerings for these notes as
183
shown in figure 4.4.2. As the altissimo register relies so much on correct tongue positioning,
in order to sound the appropriate note, the vocal tract needs to be pitched accurately to
these micro-intervals, and as in singing this is notoriously difficult to achieve as the
difference in the vocal folds is so slight as to be unreliable. It is therefore important that
Nodaïra's fingerings rely on mechanical manipulations to microtonally flatten or sharpen a
harmonic note accordingly.
Fig.4.4.2 Nodaïra's microtonal fingerings for the altissimo register
The final use of the altissimo register occurs in bar 115 of the piece where after a more
complex passage where the saxophone is playing septuplet demisemiquavers over the
piano's demisemiquavers simultaneously, the saxophone ends on a trill between A#6 and
B6 which is then followed by a very quick chromatic ascent through the harmonic notes
from A#6 to D#7. This group of notes is notated as acciaccatura demisemiquavers as
shown in figure 4.4.3 and so the performance of this group needs to be defined in order to
present a strong and definite ending to this section. The fingerings for this chromatic scale
are straightforward as the normal chromatic fingering from C#6 to F#6 can be used and
184
then overblown by a sixth as per Rousseau's method described previously. This is the
simplest fingering system for saxophones which have a high F# key. If a saxophone is
without a high F# key (my alto does not have this key) then the saxophonist can play the
normal fingering from C#6 to F6 overblowing a sixth but then must return to the fingering
for D6 and overblow a minor ninth to reach the D#7. This is achieved by moving the tongue
through the different positions from the 'head' position when playing A#6 though the 'heed'
position when overblowing a sixth and moving finally to the 'hid' position to reach the D#7
without the use of a high F# key. This accuracy of tongue position is very important in this
gesture as it is possible to place the tongue incorrectly according to the fingering, and this
results in a harmonic glissando using the tongue which is not the effect that is required.
It is important that the manipulation of the oral cavity, and especially the tongue, is as
accurate as possible when preparing and performing the altissimo passages for Nodaïra's
composition. The subtle variances of pitch can accidentally be mis-pitched through incorrect
tongue position, resulting in the incorrect note being sounded as the performer has not
moved the tongue to the desired position.
Multiphonics
As has been stated, it is Nodaïra's intention to present the listener with a composition that
has two clear elements: 'a) a simple structure created from very complex elements which
cannot be analysed by the ear. b) a complex structure which can be analysed by the ear
with great difficulty and which is created from simple elements' (Nodaïra, 1983). It is within
structure 'a' that Nodaïra uses multiphonics as a complex element which, nevertheless,
converges with the piano's line. The technique of pitching single notes within multiphonics is
used throughout these 'a' sections, and indeed it is this technique that often serves as an
anchor point to bring the piano and saxophone together as a homogenous sound.
The first multiphonic of the piece is treated in this way as the full multiphonic is sustained
from bar 1 through bar 2 but then the lowest partial is sounded, along with the piano's
185
notes, in bar three in order to create a close cluster chord of three notes each a semiquaver
apart as in figure 4.4.4 (track 87). The score shows this B3, C4, C#4 cluster clearly;
Fig.4.4.4 Ichirô Nodaïra Arabesque III (1983) bb.1-3 (piano score)
however, when reading the saxophone part this note is written as it sounds: as an A4 a
quatertone sharp as shown in figure 4.4.5 (concert C4 quartertone sharp) and so the score
does not fully take into account the microtonal nature of the multiphonic partials, and so the
resulting sound is harmonically even closer than that of a semitone to the piano's C4. By
exploiting the malleability of this multiphonic (Kientzy number 115) Nodaïra uses the
saxophone to link gestures together. In this case the forte section into the piano section
without loss of sound. This technique is used again later in the piece where Nodaïra uses the
saxophone's
Fig.4.4.5 Ichirô Nodaïra Arabesque III (1983) bb.1-3 (saxophone part)
186
ability to sound the single partial, transforming it into the full multiphonic and then
returning to the single partial in order to link sections and to create a backdrop against
which the piano plays thus promoting the homogenous sound the composer wants. This is
clear in bars 73 to 75 of the work in which the saxophone plays a long multiphonic gesture
whilst the piano plays against the full multiphonic (figure 4.4.6). In this section the piano's
material in the treble clef often coincides with the notes the saxophone is holding within the
multiphonic, for example the chord the right hand of piano plays at the end of bar 73 is
made entirely of the notes within the saxophone's multiphonic, and bar 74 uses the pitches
C#, D and F# which are enharmonic versions of the saxophone's pitches. It is interesting
that this multiphonic as described in Kientzy (2003, figure 4.4.7) notates the partials of this
multiphonic (number 119) as having a D#5 rather than, as Nodaïra notates in his piece, D5
natural as shown in figure 4.4.6. Figure 4.4.8, however, shows the resultant
notes given in Weiss & Netti (2010) which agree with Nodaïra's version which fits with the
piano's material; indeed, in practice, with this multiphonic I can pitch the D5 natural but I
187
cannot pitch a D#5 using this fingering; this could be due to Kientzy's specific equipment
set up and his own individual physiology which results in his ability to pitch this different
partial.
Nodaïra uses multiphonic trills at bar 116 (figure 4.4.9) to begin another section of complex
sound elements which are split into two groups: type B multiphonics (sound with strong
oscillation) used for forte passages and type D multiphonics (aggregate of two or more
Fig.4.4.8 Weiss & Netti multiphonic number 2 taken from The Techniques of Saxophone Playing (2010)
partials over a fundamental) used for piano passages (track 88). These two different
classifications carry with them two different methods of production. The first group is
comprised largely of stable multiphonics which change with the addition of a vent key in
order to realise the trill. The 'hawed' tongue position is needed for these multiphonics as
they are stable, and the main partials sound strongly, meaning that the addition of the vent
key for trilling purposes requires no change of tongue position. The second group, being
unstable, require a very specific tongue position in order to sound. The top note of the
multiphonic is pitched using the 'heed' position and then this note is 'split' by relaxing the
throat to a deep 'who'd' position; an action which feels the same as a descending throat
188
glissando. This level of specificity creates a delicate sound for these dyads which matches
their mezzo piano dynamic. The final trill of this section occurs in bar 120 (figure 4.4.10)
and it is problematic for a number of reasons. Firstly, the fingerings given by Nodaïra cannot
be performed at the speed necessary for a trill as the co-ordination needed to remove the
third finger of the right hand from the F# trill key whilst adding the first, second and fourth
finger of the right hand at the speed needed to perform a trill is not possible. Secondly both
multiphonics within the trill require different tongue positions in order to sound. The first
multiphonic acts much like the type D multiphonics we have seen in the previous bars in
that the saxophonist is to pitch the top note of the multiphonic and place the tongue in the
'who'd' position. For the second multiphonic the tongue needs to be placed in the 'heed'
position and so in order to perform this particular trill the tongue would need to move from
one specific position to another at the speed of a trill which is not possible. One solution to
this problem can be heard in Claude Delangle's version as recorded on his album The
Japanese Saxophone (1998) where it can clearly be heard that Delangle plays a trill
between two type B multiphonics, the second being the multiphonic fingering as stipulated
in the score (track 89). As the fingering for the second multiphonic uses many fingers the
most likely fingering chosen by Delangle is the addition of key 6 to the existing fingering
189
which changes the second multiphonic (Kientzy number 115) into a modification of Kientzy
multiphonic number 118, maintaining the multiphonic type and timbre which then allows
the two to be trilled.
Nodaïra's use of type D multiphonics as a harmonic backdrop echoes the piano's use of the
third pedal in order to sound a general harmonic wash to the piece coming from either the
saxophone or the piano and thus further promoting the idea that the two instruments
should sound as one. Figure 4.4.11 shows bars 64 to 69 of the score where the saxophone
holds dyads whilst the piano plays rhythmic gestures over the top. This promotes the idea
of a foreground and a background in these instances within the work and the performance
of these dyads can reflect that, as these dyads are unstable and are pitched by 'splitting' a
note. They have the characteristic of being delicate and this can be exploited to keep the
multiphonic in the background of the sound. This is done by producing the multiphonic using
a slow and gentle air stream and using the tongue to split the note under very low air
pressure. This technique will keep the pitches of the multiphonic intact whilst making it
possible to keep the volume low and to play within the resonance of the piano.
Nodaïra's choice of multiphonics largely correspond with the purpose they serve within the
piece, with strongly oscillating type B multiphonics serving as strong gestural material and
unstable type D dyads serving to create a harmonic backing to the piano's material;
promoting the idea of homogeny. These multiphonics can therefore be produced in specific
ways in order to ensure that these roles are fulfilled and to establish the hierarchy of the
piano or saxophone being in the foreground or the background as appropriate.
190
Bisbigliando
One of the ways Nodaïra presents his idea of complex sound elements is to take a single
note in the saxophone part and to treat it in various ways, using alternate fingerings and
bisbigliando trills alongside double and flutter tonguing to make this single note sonically
interesting. Figure 4.4.12 shows bars 49 to 54 of the saxophone part and includes different
techniques in the saxophone's line including bisbigliando on the note E5 for which Nodaïra
suggests adding the C finger to the normal fingering in order to sound the effect (track 90).
This addition of a lower key makes a one-finger fork. This flattens the sound so that a deficit
of 7Hz is heard. This deficit is the difference between E5 at 392Hz and the alternative
fingering of E5 with the added C key which sounds at 385Hz. Figures 4.4.13 and 4.4.14
show the alternate fingering suggestion from both Weiss & Netti (figure 4.4.13, track 91)
and Londeix (figure 4.4.14, track 92), and in both cases the addition of extra keys to the
normal fingering is the only option possible in this instance due to the speed needed to play
the bisbigliando.
191
Fig.4.4.13 Alternate fingerings for E5 taken from Weiss & Netti (2010)
Fig.4.4.14 Alternate fingerings for E5 taken from Londeix (1989)
192
With this in mind, it is suggested that the low B key (Londiex), the low Bb key (Weiss &
Netti) or the Eb/D#key (both) be added. All of these alternatives (including Nodaïra's
fingerings) can be performed at speed and the following table compares the resultant pitch
relative to that of the normal E5 which sounds at 392Hz.
Table 25: Resultant frequencies from playing alternate fingerings for the note E5
Nodaïra's Weiss & Netti's Londeix Shared Londeix and Weiss

fingering
fingering Fingering & Netti fingering
Sounding 385Hz 390Hz 391Hz 397Hz
frequency
Difference from -7Hz -2Hz -1Hz +5Hz
E5
Although the results from this table indicate that Weiss & Netti and Londeix's fingering
alternatives are the closest in Hz to the original pitch, it is probable that if these alternatives
were played as a bisbigliando then the difference in pitch is so subtle as to be barely audible
to the listener and so the effect cannot be detected by the ear. This means that the larger
pitch deficit/surplus is preferable for this technique so as to be audible. The shared Londeix
and Weiss & Netti fingering (track 93) gives a subtle change whereas Nodaïra's fingering
results in a more obvious change in pitch, yet it seems that, with the surrounding material
consisting of pitches that have been altered somehow (double tonguing and flutter
tonguing), the composer would want the bisbigliando to be as close to the original pitch as
possible in order to differentiate it from a microtonal trill. For this reason the fingering found
in both Londeix and Weiss & Netti (the addition of the Eb key to the normal fingering) is the
most appropriate.
Fig.4.4.15 alternate fingerings for the note D5 as taken from Weiss & Netti (2010) and Londeix (1989)
193
A similar methodology can be applied to the next bisbigliando on the note D5 as once again
Nodaïra's fingering results in a much wider sonic deficit from the normal note than does
Weiss & Netti's and Londeix's suggestions. Figure 4.4.15 shows Weiss & Netti's and
Londeix's alternate fingerings, of which only the one which adds the low B key can be
played at the speed required. This is different from Nodaïra's fingering which has the
saxophonist opening the C# key to achieve the trill, and this hints that whichever of the low
keys are opened (low C#, B or Bb) will result in a flattening of pitch in accordance with
Benade's open-hole lattice principle. Table 26 displays the resultant frequencies from the
addition of each of these keys and the sonic difference in Hz between the alternate fingering
and the normal D5 which sounds at 349Hz.
Table 26: Resultant frequencies from playing alternate fingerings for the note D5
Added key (to D5) Low C# (Nodaïra's Low B (Shared Low Bb

fingering) suggestion from both
Weiss & Netti and
Londeix)
Sounding frequency 354 347 344
Difference from D5 +5Hz -2Hz -5Hz
Again the table shows that the shared suggestion as found in both Weiss & Netti and
Londeix is too close to the normal frequency to be practicable for a bisbigliando and so a
choice must be made between sharpening or flattening the pitch by 5Hz. It seems
appropriate here that as the chosen alternative fingering for the note E5 as shown in table
26 (shared Weiss & Netti and Londeix suggestion) also added 5Hz to the normal sounding
194
frequency then to do the same in this instance and use Nodaïra's fingering will promote
consistency for this technique and produce a similar sound for each of the trills.
Nodaïra uses bisbigliando as one of a number of ways to change a pitch into a more
complex sound element and so the choice of fingering for each instance of the technique is
important not only to realise the effect but to retain the sounding of the pitch whilst
registering a change of timbre in the listener's ear. The process presented here is one way
in which a performer can make fingering choices based upon the sounds that are desired at
this point in the composition.
As has already been stated the composer wishes to use an extensive palette of sounds from
'raw sound to normal playing' (Nodaïra, 1998) and so Nodaïra's raw sound elements are
achieved through altering the embouchure so as to constrict the air flowing into the
instrument and therefore change the sound. This happens during a period of tremolo where
the score is marked 'le sons apparait progressivement' indicating that the performer is to
progressively introduce air into the instrument so that the gesture grows from key sounds
('raw' sounds) to normal playing gradually (figure 4.4.16). This is done by changing the
embouchure into the subtone position by withdrawing the bottom lip into the mouth and
dropping the jaw so that a little more lip is exposed to the reed thus subduing the vibration.
This technique can be sustained for the entire passage, once again promoting the idea of
homogeny between the two instruments which are trilling as one in this passage.
The second use of 'raw sound' in the piece comes in the last bar where the composer
stipulates a sforzando attack with a long diminuendo using only air sound indicated by the
direction 'Uniquement le souffle' or 'air only'. Nodaïra has indicated that the fingering of Bb3
should be used which closes the saxophone's tube completely thus amplifying the air stream
as much as possible, but blowing hard into the mouthpiece with a normal embouchure does
not sound a sufficiently strong attack for the dynamic marked (figure 4.4.17). It is therefore
necessary to take the top lip away from the mouthpiece and to withdraw the mouthpiece
195
slightly from the mouth in order to direct the air stream directly into the gap between the
reed and the tip of the mouthpiece. Once the szforzando attack has been sounded in this
way the player can replace the lips onto the mouthpiece in the normal embouchure shape in
order to perform the long diminuendo from piano to niente, ending the piece convincingly
(track 94).
Key Percussion
Another indication of homogeny between the saxophone and the piano occurs in bar 125
where the composer indicates that the saxophonist should make as many varied key sounds
as possible ('Bruits de clés les plus varies possible'). This technique is significant at this
point as the piano is trilling on a muted note that has been stopped by depressing the string
with the finger; the symbol for this is displayed over the piano line (figure 4.4.18). These
two 'complex sound elements' once again promote the composer's intention of one overall
sound for this work. Key percussion at this point is, therefore, to be varied from the piano's
trill. Using the trill keys on the side of the saxophone is an effective use of key percussion
196
as their location half way down the instrument's tube makes them resonant enough to be
heard and they can be used at higher speeds. Keys lower down the instrument, however,
result in a more resonant sound but are not as easy to play quickly. The palm keys at the
top of the instrument do not produce much sound as there is little of the tube to reSonata
in. As the composer wishes to hear 'as many varied key sounds as possible' a mixture of
each type of key sound can be experimented with in this section, bearing in mind the sound
coming from the piano and the homogeny that is to be maintained. The more resonant keys
at the bottom end of the instrument are therefore to be used sparingly as it is easy for
these notes to overpower the piano's muted trill therefore bringing the saxophone into the
foreground and not conforming to the piece's homogeny.
Flutter Tongue
Alongside bisbigliando trills Nodaïra uses flutter tonguing, another technique by which the
simple material can be altered to create a complex sound. The use of flutter tongue
throughout Arabesque III is often surrounded by other changes of timbre such as double
tonguing a single note or a bisbigliando on a single note in order to highlight the sonic
change of these simple pitches. Figure 4.4.19 shows bars 49-54 of the saxophone part, a
passage in which this behaviour is apparent. In this section the saxophonist has to move
quickly between the tongue position necessary for double tonguing and the hard palate
position needed to facilitate the tongue flutter technique. If the throat flutter technique is
used it negates the need for this awkward tongue movement whilst still presenting the
197
listener with a sufficiently audible disturbance of the air column. This technique does not
work as well when the flutter technique is sounded at the same time as a second sonic
disturbance such as a multiphonic (figure 4.4.20). In this instance the throat flutter does
not create as strong a sound as the tongue flutter and so it cannot be heard over the
secondary technique; therefore, the tongue flutter will be more audible at these points.
198
Slap Tongue
The saxophone's slap tongue effect is used throughout Nodaïra's composition to echo the
piano's technique of string damping; the instruments use these techniques independently
until bar 77 where the two instruments converge to play this percussive effect (figure
4.4.21). Again, to promote Nodaïra's notion of a homogenous sound, it is important that
these two technique are performed so that they are sonically very similar. This can be
achieved by the saxophonist performing the slap in the normal way but adding a little air
into the instrument, creating an effect which is half way between Weiss & Netti's normal
slap, which is fully pitched or even sustained, and a secco slap which is a dry un-pitched
effect (Weiss & Netti, 2010). By adding a tiny bit of air to the secco slap the saxophonist can
achieve a dry slap, within which the pitch resonates, thus mimicking the stopped string of
the piano with its attack and minimal, yet inevitable, decay (track 95).
Fig.4.4.21 Ichirô Nodaïra Arabesque III (1983) piano score b.82 (saxophone part at the top)
Circular Breathing
It cannot be said that circular breathing is a technique Nodaïra exploits in any significant
way in this piece but the technique can be used in order to facilitate his notation during a
particular moment in the work. Figure 4.4.22 shows bars 71-75 of Arabesque III during
which the piano plays solo material against the backdrop of the saxophone's held
multiphonic which starts as the lowest partial, sounded alone, before the tongue moves in
199
the normal way for the whole spectrum of partials to sound. Depending on the pianist's
realisation of the triangular and square fermata markings, (meaning medium and long
pauses respectively), this multiphonic is to be held longer than a normal lung-full of air can
sustain. Circular breathing is necessary, therefore, so as not to break the sound during this
moment (the composer acknowledges this by adding a bracketed breath comma half-way
through the multiphonic indicating that the saxophonist may take a breath if necessary).
There is a problem with circular breathing during multiphonics. The tongue needs to be in
the specific 'who'd' position for the multiphonic to sound, yet, the act of circular breathing
requires the tongue to adopt the 'hid' position in order to push the air forward in the mouth,
maintaining the pressure required to sound the pitch, whilst at the same time retaining
contact with the soft palate thus sealing the rear of the oral cavity so that air can be inhaled
through the nose. The only option available therefore is to circular breathe on the solo
partial in bars 72 and 73 and then to move the tongue into the required position at the end
of bar 73 to ensure the full multiphonic sounds. By approaching the gesture in this way a
player can ensure that they have sufficient air in their lungs at the end of bar 73 to sustain
the multiphonic throughout the piano's solo material in bars 73 to 75.
200
Fig.4.4.22 Ichirô Nodaïra Arabesque III (1983) piano score bb. 71-75
201
Section 5
Scott Mc Laughlin Neither Wholes nor Parts (2010) For Alto
Saxophone
The inception of the piece Neither Wholes nor Parts (2010) by Scott Mc Laughlin came about
through the demonstration of a technique which involves a mixture of both multiphonic
production and the manipulation of partials within that multiphonic. This mixture of
techniques led to an open improvisation piece for saxophone and laptop entitled Whitewater
(2007), in which the saxophonist acted as duo partner with a max/msp patch running an
artificial life matrix based upon cellular automata. The upshot of this pairing is that the
composition which uses an input/output max/msp patch and has the saxophone's
multiphonics triggering similar pitches in the patch which then (in theory) could be further
reacted to by the improviser turning a basic in/out relationship between saxophonist and
computer system into a symbiotic relationship. The stasis of this quasi-composition was
then to be captured in Mc Laughlin's next composition using this technique Neither Wholes
nor Parts for which the composer developed a specific notation based upon the behaviour of
multiphonics. The two types of multiphonic that the composer preferred were, to use Weiss
and Netti's classifications: type E – narrow dyad and type D/B – Wide multiphonic, usually
built on a minor ninth (also second), partly oscillating (Weiss & Netti, 2010). These
multiphonics had the sound and the level of manipulation that the composer wished to use
throughout the piece; the notation system that was therefore adopted is explained by the
composer as follows:
stave: the three lines are the lowest and highest pitches available, the middle
is notionally the middle of the instrument range but depends on multiphonics
chosen, this is very flexible.
Notes that appear contiguous should have the same pitch. Where a normal
note follows a partial at the same visual height an appropriate microtonal
fingering may be needed to maintain pitch parity; subtle microtonal
deviations are expected.
Avoid the extremes of high register unless very quiet and stable.
Vertical dashed lines indicate a fingering change, all multiphonics between a

given set of dashed lines should be performed with the same fingerings
202
noteheads: white/open are multiphonic partials, black/closed are standard
fingered pitches.
Single open noteheads are a sngle partial from a fingering.
Two or more vertically stacked white noteheads are a chord but necessarily a
full bloom of the multiphonic; they should be separate percepts.
A single vertical open note covering the whole register is a full bloom of
multiphonic, a single percept. Not individual partials.
Parentheses: notes in parentheses should only be vaguely perceivable, the
slightest hint.
Dashed noteheads: indicate a halo of multiphonic sound, a full percept but
only barely more than a partial.
X-noteheads: indicate short unpitched breath attack.
Time is relative: un-stemmed notes are long; stemmed are shorter and more
gestural; beamed are fast.
If the player can circular breath smoothly then these can be much longer,
though no more than a minute per event.
Dynamics should be mostly as quiet as is possible to produce (relatively)
stable multiphonics.
(Mc Laughlin, 2010)
In this legend of the notational system Mc Laughlin makes regular reference to the music
being 'perceived' as musical events, giving the impression of a semi-improvised and static
piece with detail within each gesture by treating them as multiphonic events and in this way
Neither Wholes nor Parts is a microcosm of the preceding compositions.
One of the key features of this work is that each performer chooses the multiphonics that
they deem best to fit the gestures within the piece. This choice relies on a number of
factors: does the multiphonic lie within the register the composer wants? Does the
multiphonic behave in the way the composer wishes it to? Does the the multiphonic share a
common note with others around it for linking passages?
It is the performer's task to choose their multiphonics that not only fulfil these criteria but
behave in such a way that makes them performable according to the specific performer's
physiology and experience.
203
Multiphonics
As this piece is predominantly written for multiphonics it seems pertinent to describe the
multiphonics I have chosen to play the piece, and to outline why these multiphonics are
appropriate. The multiphonic I have chosen to begin the piece with is a narrow dyad
comprising the notes C5 a quarter tone flat and E5 (type E, figure 4.5.1). This multiphonic
is identified in Kientzy's book as number 90 which also informs us that one is able to
separate the pitches but there will be some air noise (+S) present as shown in column three
of figure 4.5.2. Kientzy #90 is also a quiet multiphonic with the separated pitch C2 quarter
tone flat only
executable at pianissimo dynamic level. In practice the saxophonist needs to form a subtone
embouchure in order to achieve this separation, moving the jaw forward and exposing more
lip to the reed suppressing the vibration. In this position the lower partial of Kientzy
204
multiphonic number 90 becomes stable and so the player is able to circular breathe this
note to give it the longevity the score demands. Once the player has performed the opening
of this gesture the lip can be returned to its ordinary playing position to execute the full
dyad (track 96). The physical manipulation of the embouchure in this instance allows the
multiphonic to 'bloom' as the composer intends, in an unbroken and gradually developing
gesture. To isolate the upper partial of this same dyad as is required in the second gesture
one must adopt the 'Who'd' tongue position where the tongue is raised toward the soft
palate at the rear of the oral cavity. This suppresses the lower partial as it essentially treats
the upper partial as a harmonic of the first, isolating it as we do with fundamental tones.
With a little practise these minor alterations of embouchure and tongue position give the
player the control they need when playing dyads throughout this piece.
The second dyad used is Kientzy number 66 (figure 4.5.3) and the reason I have chosen
this to be the second dyad is twofold: firstly, it is comprised of the pitches C5 and E5 a
quarter tone flat which is very close to the pitches of the first dyad and therefore occupies
the same space on the stave, and secondly, the fingering of this second dyad differs from
Kientzy multiphonic number 90 only in the addition of key 7, making for a smooth change
from one to the other. Fingerings that progress cleanly from one multiphonic to the other
deserve consideration when maintaining the sounds of the gestures in this piece, and
multiphonics of similar types are generally played together within an event to achieve this.
The end of line two of Neither Wholes nor Parts introduces a new gesture for the piece
where the device of sustaining a lower fundamental, yet playing a rhythm over the top of
this sustained tone, is used (figure 4.5.4). For this effect I have chosen a multiphonic of
type D/B which includes a partial oscillation that helps to separate the tones
205
of the multiphonic out from one another and uses the oscillation itself to create the pulsing
effect required. Kientzy number 67, being larger than a dyad, lends itself to multiple
manipulations, firstly sounding the lowest fundamental only using subtone in much the
same way as numbers 90 and 66 have been manipulated previously. Secondly, by forming
the 'Head' tongue position the player can sound the lowest note F4 quarter tone sharp and
the G5 simultaneously, and also if the tongue is pushed even further forward in the mouth
the player can also isolate the G5 and play it as a harmonic from the multiphonic fingering
as shown in Kientzy's diagram (figure 4.5.5). Forming the 'heed' tongue position pushes
more tongue towards the hard palate at the front of the mouth and it is by doing
this that the saxophonist can isolate C#6, the highest note of the multiphonic. The full
multiphonic on this fingering is sounded by adopting the normal tongue position 'Hawed',
making it as stable as a normal tone. It is a mixture of using subtone to isolate the lowest
note and repeatedly raising and lowering the tongue in and out of the 'Head' position that
the player is able to achieve the effect the composer wishes of a pulsating sound over a
sustained single note (figure 4.5.6, track 97).
206
This technique is also used later in the piece, but this time in reverse; the highest note of
the multiphonic is sustained whilst the lower partials are sounded as dashed noteheads
which are barely audible instances of the multiphonic that the composer describes as a
'halo' of sound. For this gesture I have chosen Kientzy number 80 (figure 4.5.7) which is a
similar D/E type to number 67 but is comprised of a minor ninth plus an minor sixth plus a
fourth making it a four-note multiphonic. Kientzy's chart depicts the very effect the
composer wants to achieve in the far right of the table, informing us that it is possible to
sound the F5 three quarter tones sharp individually and to be able to bring in the other
partials beneath it. This is done by the saxophonist by reversing the manipulation of number
67; starting in the 'heed' position and slowly relaxing the tongue into the 'Hawed' position
to sound the complete multiphonic. As the composer wants only a hint of sound for the
multiphonic 'halo' the player needs to ensure that this tongue movement is as slight as
possible. It is this element of control that the composer wishes to exploit throughout this
work.
Grouping multiphonic fingering types together is necessary on the second page of the work
where the gesture becomes slightly more complex. At the end of the second line of page
two the saxophonist needs to find a mid-range partial to isolate which blooms into a
multiphonic and ends up as a high-range partial. This high range partial is then switched to
207
a different multiphonic by the dashed vertical line, but as the composer tells us 'Notes that
appear contiguous should have the same pitch' and so as the highest partial is held the
fingering must change. This is why I have chosen to use Kientzy number 67 with which to
start the phrase and, by removing key 6 and adding the low B key, one can change to
Kientzy number 58 (figure 4.5.8) without disturbing the upper partial. This is achieved in
the normal way of starting the tongue in the 'Hid' position, moving through the 'Hawed'
position and then moving quickly to the 'Heed' position.
Whilst maintaining this position the saxophonist can change the fingering without affecting
the held upper partial before reversing the process and returning to the 'Hawed' position to
sound the new multiphonic and back to the 'Hid' position to complete the gesture.
Pitch Techniques
One of Mc Laughlin's influences is spectral music, and the extensive use of multiphonics
throughout Neither Wholes nor Parts follows this interest as partials are juxtaposed with a
'standard fingered pitch' in order to highlight the timbral difference between them. However,
these fundamental tones are often juxtaposed with the complex upper notes of the
multiphonics and these by their nature are usually de-tuned from the tempered scale. In
order to highlight only a timbral and not a pitched difference, it is necessary to use quarter-
tones to match as closely as possible the partial which has been isolated. This practice of
pitch-matching isolated tones from each multiphonic demands an intimate knowledge of the
multiphonic by the performer alongside a reliable and consistent technique in order to
reproduce the same quarter-tonal partial in each performance.
208
Most of these instances in the score occur alongside the multiphonics I have described
above and so it is through a knowledge of these multiphonics that the performer can
prepare the appropriate micro-tonal notes to achieve the juxtaposition. Kientzy's chart
indicated the upper note of the dyad to be E5 and in the case of Kientzy multiphonic
number 90 (figure 4.5.2) when the 'standard fingered pitch' is played its tonal quality is
indeed only fractionally different from that of the partial, albeit, slightly brighter in pitch. As
the fingering for the note E5 is located far down the length of the instrument there are not
sufficient opportunities to flatten the pitch using the keys that lie beneath the E5 tone hole
and so the pitch is played as a regular E5 when performing the gesture as shown in figure
4.5.9.
In contrast the highest partial of Kientzy multiphonic 67 is indicated in his chart as being the
note C#6 whereas when the partial is isolated from the whole multiphonic, it is clear that
the partial is fractionally brighter in pitch than the regular fingered tone. As the note C#5 is
high up the instrument's tube (in fact it is an open note with the addition of the octave key)
the most effective way to raise the pitch to that of the partial is to open the second octave
pip through the addition of the third finger. This vent fingering is often used to regulate the
unreliably sharp C#4, smoothing the transition over the break, and is a useful way to match
the two pitches in this instance (figure 4.5.10) where a change of timbre but not of pitch is
desired.
209
Kientzy multiphonic number 80, which I have chosen for the gesture in figure 4.5.11 due to
its matched highest partial with the preceding multiphonic, has the note C6 three quarter
tones sharp as its top note when played as a partial. Weiss & Netti (2010) contains the
fingering for this note that matches the resultant sound from the previous multiphonic, and
the fundamental pitch and harmonic pitch can both be played whilst retaining the same
specific frequency, as the composer wishes.
Slap Tongue
The composer tells us in his performance directions that an x-notehead indicates a 'short
unpitched breath attack' (figure 4.5.12). When working with the composer directly,
however, it becomes apparent that a strong tongued articulation is required for this
technique, akin to Weiss & Netti's secco slap tongue effect but at extremely low volume.
This technique is achieved by applying only the tip of the tongue to the reed and using that
portion of the tongue to form a vacuum on the reed and, when pulled away, create the slap
shown in figure 4.5.12 (track 98).
210
Circular Breathing
In relation to the temporal aspect of the composition the composer tells us in his
performance directions that 'time is relative: un-stemmed notes are long; stemmed are
shorter and more gestural; beamed are fast. If the player can circular breathe smoothly
then these can be much longer, though no more than a minute per event' (Mc Laughlin,
2010). This open invitation for circular breathing serves to heighten the dramatic tension of
each gesture by drawing it out over a longer period of time; however, the problem of tongue
placement whilst playing full multiphonics is again present as the tongue is needed during
the act of circular breathing to keep the air pressure of the air caught in the cheeks
sufficiently high so as to sound the pitch. The solution to this problem is to circular breathe
on the low fundamental notes either side of the full multiphonic, resulting in the overall
phrase being longer but the full multiphonic being unbroken by movement of the tongue.
This technique can be applied in all of the instances of this gesture throughout the piece
especially the first and last which include un-stemmed lower partials with ties making them
very long as depicted in figure 4.5.13.
211
Section 6
Ben Isaacs I Never Look Like Myself (2009) For Soprano Saxophone
The music of Ben Isaacs has a strong character in that the composer is interested in the
relationship between sound and silence and in particular the threshold that separates these
two states. To this end Issac's music is typically written within a confined spectrum at the
lowest end of the instrument's dynamic range, with the lowest dynamic usually being niente
and the highest dynamic possibility being, in the case of this composition, 'barely there'.
Isaacs also writes crescendo and diminuendo markings between either end of the range.
This style of composition highlights a tension between silence and sound, and puts the
performer under pressure to constantly asses the balance between audible sound and in-
audible gesture following the contours of the composer's crescendo and diminuendo
markings. The benefit of writing for a wind instrument in this case is that the player is able
to gradually introduce sound by gradually increasing air into the instrument through their
control of the air column they introduce into it, which allows for an almost infinite gradation
of sound from silence, to air sound, to un-pitched air sound, to pitched air sound, and so on
until the lowest volume of the pitch is heard.
The composer states at the beginning of the score that 'It could perhaps be argued that the
score is in this case rather unrepresentative of the sounding result; one encounters two
pages of continuous microtonally ascending scales underpinned by smooth dynamic
hairpins, and whilst in performance there is a clear sense of upward motion, the sounding
result is far more fragile and sporadic than the score might initially suggest' (Isaacs, 2009).
This highlights another tension within the piece (which has conventional notation, figure
4.6.1), resulting in a rather unconventional sound (track 99). This tension is apparent in
hearing the piece as the performer struggles to keep the notes from sounding until the top
of each hairpin, resulting in the sounding of different sections of the microtonal material in
each performance. The composer himself states that 'The aim when adopting such
techniques is to create a volatile and dynamic performance situation in which the tactility of
212
the sound and “live-ness” of the performer’s actions is an integral part of the musical
experience' indicating that an element of chance is inherent in the production of these
dynamics and that he wishes to exploit the transient nature of a performance in order to
ensure that one performance differs from the next.
Fig.4.6.1 Ben Isaacs I Never Look Like Myself (2009) movement I bb.2-3
Microtones
Regarding the microtonal nature of the piece the composer states 'I use microtones as a
way to enhance the intricacy and intimacy of the music rather than to build specific
harmonic structures. My pieces invariably operate in very compressed musical spaces, and
constricting the intervallic content of the music certainly aids the construction of this
aspect'. This statement reinforces Isaac's overall aesthetic of 'compressed musical spaces' in
harmony and dynamic, but also duration as each of the four movements in the piece are
between 16 and 18 bars long.
The musical space in the case of this piece is compressed between the notes A5 and D6
quartertones sharp, with microtonal increments filling up the space in between. The
following table shows the exact microtones that are used in I never look like myself (2009):
Table 27: List of microtones that are used in Ben Isaacs I Never Look Like Myself (2009)
A5
A5 quartertone sharp
A#5
A5 three quartertones sharp
B5
213
B5 quartertone sharp
C6
C6 quartertone sharp
C#6
C6 three quartertones sharp
D6
D6 quartertone sharp
It is interesting that each microtone in the piece is written as a sharp rather than a flat and
indeed no enharmonics are used at all, this indicates that, as the pitch is constantly rising,
each microtone is to be as close to the normal pitch as possible so as to compress the sonic
space as much as possible. In order to achieve this effect the different fingering suggestions
for these microtones need to be explored for their sonic proximity to the normal pitch, and
it is this information which aids my choice of fingering throughout the piece. Figure 4.6.2
shows the fingering suggestions from Weiss & Netti for pitches in between these two notes
and figure 4.6.3 shows Londeix's suggestions.
Fig.4.6.2 Fingering suggestions for microtones between the notes A5 and D5 quartertone sharp taken from Weiss &
Netti (2010)
214
Fig.4.6.3 Fingering suggestions for microtones between the notes A5 and D5 quartertone sharp taken from Londeix
(1989)
There are inevitable cross-overs in fingering suggestions between the two texts as displayed
above. These cross-overs usually occur where the key work on the instrument results in
only one microtonal fingering being available. For example the fingering for Weiss & Netti's
A5 three quartertones sharp is the same as Londeix's B5 quartertone flat, even though they
215
are notated enharmonically; therefore, the only choice available to the performer for
sharpening the note Bb5 is to use the bis fingering (first finger plus the bis key) and to add
the Bb trill key to raise the pitch. It is the discrepancy between these two resources that
offer the performer choice as to how much to close the sonic gap between microtones, and
therefore create the 'compression' the composer wishes to convey.
The following table shows those fingerings that are conflicting in both Weiss & Netti and
Londeix's book.
Table 28: Fingering suggestions from Weiss & Netti (2010) and Londeix (1989)
Pitch A5 B5 C5 C5 three D5 quartertone

quartertone quartertone quartertone quartertones sharp
sharp sharp sharp sharp
Weiss and 814Hz 912Hz 990Hz 1042Hz 1094Hz
Netti
Londeix 798Hz 927Hz 952Hz 1013Hz 1094Hz
930Hz 1080Hz
In order to compress the sound into as small a sonic space as possible the fingerings that
are higher in frequency are preferable for use in this piece. This is because each microtone
is notated as a qartertone or three quartertone sharp, because the lines of the work are
consistently ascending, a higher frequency will always be closer to the next note in the
sequence. The only exception to this rule would be the last note of D5 quartertone sharp for
which the lower frequency is preferable so that this pitch is sonically close to the overall
collection of notes. My fingering choices for the piece are therefore as follows:
Table 29: Fingering choices for from Weiss & Netti (2010) and Londeix (1989) for use in Ben Isaacs I Never Look
Like Myself (2009)
Pitch A5 B5 C5 C5 three D5 quartertone
quartertone quartertone quartertone quartertones sharp
sharp sharp sharp sharp
Fingering Weiss & Londeix Weiss & Weiss & Londieix
Suggestion Netti Netti Netti
As well as the microtonal content the main characteristic of this work is the minimal sound
that is produced during its performance. In his book Hello! Mr. Sax (1989) Londeix states
216
that 'The saxophone can produce all dynamic levels from an intense forte down to a piano –
placed at the limit of silence -. It is a question of the ability of the musician or, more
precisely that of his technical ability.' (Londeix, 1989 p.84). Londeix makes this point to
contradict the misconception that the saxophone is a 'loud instrument' and is incapable of
being played quietly, and he goes on to explain that 'The p of the [accompanying voice],
consciously played with a less brilliant tone color, is an easily recognizable technique for
saxophones; it is made by using the technique referred to in jazz as '”subtone”' (Londeix,
1989 p.84). As Londeix suggests it is the subtone technique that needs to be employed to
play 'at the limit of silence' and it is this technique which will be employed during I Never
Look Like Myself (2009) in order to achieve niente playing (a contradiction in terms)
growing in volume to 'barely there'.
Normally subtone is achieved by exposing more of the lower lip to the reed so as to restrict
the vibration and to 'make heard the fundamental of a sound without its natural overtones
or harmonics' (Londeix, 1989 p.84). This gives an airy sound as only a portion of the air is
used to vibrate the reed, however, on the soprano saxophone it is possible in this range to
omit this air sound using subtle changes of lip pressure as the dynamic rises. With a
combination of increasing air pressure from the diaphragm, and gradually rolling the lower
lip forward into the normal playing position, the saxophonist can achieve a crescendo from
air only to very gentle sound and then, reversing the gesture, achieves the decrescendo. As
has been stated previously a feature of this piece is non-specific timing of these
crescendo/diminuendo and the note being sounded at the peak of the hairpin that is a
feature of the work. The speed of the semiquaver and demi-semiquaver gestures that make
up the work ensures that this non-specific approach is maintained as the saxophonist will
sound only one or two pitches at the height of each hairpin, but the specific pitches sounded
should differ from performance to performance.
217
Section 7
Ray Evanoff Diagramming a Vivisection of Yours and Mine
(Ineffectual Tracings of Antiquated Sounds): A Floregium
(2010)
The music of Ray Evanoff is created from seemingly disparate gestures brought together
and overlaid on top of one another which results in a multi-layered complexity affecting the
notational values of the gestures giving multiple senses of pulse sounding simultaneously
within a solo work. In the performance directions for the piece the composer states:
Rhythm is generally spaced proportionately, with exceptions being

made in the case of extremely tight durations caused by overlaying
triplet and standard values, as well as in the case of a few extremely
lengthy durations. Where possible, rhythmic values have been beamed
to show 8th-note groupings - this has been done only for reasons of
performance practicality, meaning that the presence, absence, or
displacement of an 8th-note pulse should not be regarded as materially
significant.
The idea that an overall pulse is not 'materially significant' is one aspect of the
composition's character, and is further complicated by the device of using '2/3' time over
specific notes or rests whereby in each instance:
' lasts for the equivalent of but lacks the accompanying

rest which would align it with a standard 16th-note value'
The device of composing a piece which includes layered material so as to break away from a
sense of an empirical pulse is further enhanced by the use of microtones throughout the
work.
These microtones serve to compress and augment the pitched material in the work, often
with identifiable patterns occurring within each 'layer' but sounded at the same time. There
are two types of microtone used throughout this work: microtones that are derived from a
vented or forked fingering; and those that are derived from a partial of a multiphonic.
Multiphonics are also used throughout the work and these are split into the three playing
categories of type B multiphonics (sound with strong oscillation); type C multiphonics (wide
dyad, stable); and type E multiphonics (narrow dyad). These multiphonic types are used
218
within one layer of the composition and are even interrupted by the second layer, again
enhancing the compositional technique on display within the work. This constant tension
between the two layers of compositional material are enhanced through the use of these
techniques, and my choice of production techniques and fingerings are based upon the need
to emphasise this feature. As the composer states 'The intention... is to indicate a collision
between materials/forces, and it is the expression of this collision that is most important'.
Microtones
Throughout the composition, Evanoff uses phrases that purposefully place microtonal
alternative of a pitch alongside the regularly tempered version of the same pitch, this device
serves to compress the pitched material within a layer which is often interrupted by the
second layer of the composition. This is exemplified by the two note phrase in figure 4.7.1,
acting as a motif throughout the work, which shows the device of two layers converging
upon the same gesture as indicated by the use two different beams (track 100).
Fig.4.7.1 Ray Evanoff Diagramming a Vivisection of Yours and Mine (Ineffectual Tracings of Antiquated Sounds): A
Floregium (2010) mvmt 1 page 1 line 4
In order to emphasise the feature of one microtonal layer being interrupted by a non
microtonal layer the D6 quartertone flat will benefit from being accurately located half-way
between C6 and D6 as this will emphasise the microtonal interval between the two notes.
Referring to Weiss & Netti (2010) and Londeix (1989) gives the saxophonist fingering
alternatives for this note, and in this instance the target frequency that will be required for
the microtone is (concert C6 (1046Hz) – concert B5 (987Hz) = 59Hz) 1016Hz as this is B5
(987Hz) plus half of the difference between the two notes surrounding the microtone (59Hz
÷ 2 = 29.5HZ). Of the two fingering options available from the main resources it is
219
Londeix's suggestion which comes closest at 1014Hz with Weiss and Netti's suggestion
being much sharper at 1029Hz, making it very close to concert C6 which sounds at 1046Hz.
For a specific interval such as the one shown in figure 4.7.1 it is important to maintain the
accuracy of the quartertone as it is this augmentation of an interval which creates the sense
of interruption (this being the main feature of the work).
The second use of microtones within the work is the placing of it alongside the normal
tempered pitch which has the effect of accentuating the difference in tuning between the
two pitches. Figure 4.7.2 is an example of this type of gesture includes the written notes A5
quartertone flat immediately followed by A5. Because this gesture is fast (occurring in the
time of one quaver of the overall pulse) the fingering needs to be easily executable, which is
not problematic for this pitch as the general consensus for flattening the note A is to create
a one or two fingered fork by putting the right hand down, and this can be seen in figure
4.7.3 which shows both Weiss & Netti's and Londeix's suggestions.
Fig.4.7.3 Fingering suggestion for the note A5 quartertone flat as taken from Weiss & Netti (2010, left) and Londeix
(1989, right)
220
This is the case for each instance when this gesture occurs, (figure 4.7.4). Every time this
quick phrase is featured the addition of either a vent fingering (trill key) or a forked
fingering works at the speed necessary and the texts agree on these fingerings (figure
4.7.5, track 101).
Fig.4.7.4 Examples of consecutive microtones with tempered notes taken from Ray Evanoff's Diagramming a
Vivisection of Yours and Mine (Ineffectual Tracings of Antiquated Sounds): A Floregium (2010)
Fig.4.7.5 Fingering suggestion for the notes C5 quartertone sharp,F5 quartertone sharp and B5 quartertone flat as
taken from Weiss & Netti (2010, top) and Londeix (1989, bottom) n.b Londeix's fingering for B5 quartertone flat
uses the 'Ta' trill key to produce the fork instead of the third finger; the result is, however, the same.
The third incarnation of microtones in Evanoff's piece feature microtones that are actually a
partial of a multiphonic. In order to maintain the sound of these microtones, the partial can
be played with the other partial suppressed by the tongue thus giving the phrase a
221
consistent sound. Figure 4.7.6 shows an instance from the beginning of the work where the
lowest fundamental of the multiphonic is sounded by adopting the subtone embouchure
thus stopping the upper partials from sounding. The example in figure 4.7.6 is
straightforward in its production technique (track 102); however, other instances of the
usage of these multiphonics offers the performer a choice as to the production of pitches in
the work.
Figure 4.7.7 shows an instance from second movement where a multiphonic is sounded
followed by the top note of the multiphonic on its own. In this passage the performer has
the choice of sounding the individual pitch (D6 quartertone flat in the case of figure 4.7.7)
as a microtonal fingering or as the top partial of the multiphonic, thus
maintaining the multiphonic fingering (track 103). When the two versions of the D6
quartertone flat are measured on the oscilloscope, the fundamental fingering sounds at
1014Hz yet the top partial of the multiphonic sounds at 1035Hz. As the top partial is
222
sharper than the vented fingering, it should be used in order to maintain consistency within
the phrase.
Multiphonics
The composer uses three different multiphonic types throughout the work, each of which
serves a specific gestural purpose. Table 30 displays the multiphonics that are used in group
order, as well as the dynamic range used for each group:
Table 30: List of multiphonics used in Ray Evanoff Diagramming a Vivisection of Yours and Mine (Ineffectual
Tracings of Antiquated Sounds): A Floregium (2010)
Multiphonic type B (Sound with strong C (Wide dyad, stable) E (Narrow dyad)
oscillation)
Kientzy number 5 20 6
Kientzy number 11 26 40
Kientzy number 16 21
Kientzy number 46
Dynamic pp - sfffz mp - ff pp - mf
The most dynamically versatile group being the multiphonics that make up group B, with
these multiphonics often being used for very loud accents, or to crescendo from pianissimo
to a louder dynamic such as forte or fortissimo and louder. The production of this
multiphonic group is malleable as the throat positions needed range from the 'hawed'
position throughout the entire range to the 'hid' position allowing these multiphonics (as we
have seen in the previous section) to be manipulated so that only single partials sound in
certain phrases.
The two type C dyads used are based around de-tuned octaves and are used to highlight
the microtonal shift from a pitch within the multiphonic to a fundamental pitch. Figure 4.7.8
shows a moment from movement 2 where the type C multiphonic, which has a top partial of
223
F5 quartertone sharp, is immediately followed by F5. This also occurs between multiphonics
as shown in figure 4.7.9 where the same multiphonic with F5 quartertone sharp as its
highest partial is immediately followed by a second type C multiphonic with a middle partial
being F5 quartertone sharp.
At a glance the multiphonic at the end of figure 4.7.9 may appear to be a type B
multiphonic as it uses similar intervals of type B multiphonics and an oscillation can be
achieved; however, it is in the production of type B multiphonics that their identification is
manifest. The tongue position for this multiphonic type is much more specific than type B
multiphonics because, to achieve an oscillation including both pitches, the tongue needs to
pitch the highest partial whilst dropping the lower jaw very slightly. This allows the reed to
vibrate more freely, thus sounding the multiphonic. As this multiphonic type is not as
malleable as type B multiphonics it is not therefore possible to emphasise the F5
quartertone sharp in the second multiphonic of figure 4.7.9 in order to match it to the same
note in the previous multiphonic.
224
The last multiphonic type used is type E which results in narrow dyads, either de-tuned
thirds or seconds. This multiphonic type also requires a specific pitching method which
involves the 'who'd' tongue position, and due to the nature of these narrow intervals
manipulation is not possible other than sounding individual partials (which is not asked for
in the score). The composer has included trills on some dyads as shown in figure 4.7.10
which are possible due to the mechanical nature of adding a one finger fork into the
fingering to slightly flatten the pitch; a technique which has previously been encountered in
the case of microtonal fingerings.
Fig.4.7.10 Ray Evanoff Diagramming a Vivisection of Yours and Mine (Ineffectual Tracings of Antiquated Sounds):
A Floregium (2010) mvmt 2 page 5 line 2
Slap Tongue
The composer uses slap tongue in this composition as another interruption technique, often
pairing the slap with type B multiphonic in order to deliver the maximum impact on the
sound. As well as using the slap to accentuate a dynamic or timbral contrast, Evanoff uses
the technique in order to explore different approaches to articulation; the antithesis of this
technique being his direction on certain pitches not to use the tongue at all but to articulate
from the diaphragm only. Figure 4.7.11 shows a feature of the composition where the slap
is followed by multiple repetitions of the same pitch, which are achieved by using double
tonguing with an un-specified number of repetitions. In these instances, and indeed
throughout the piece, the slap tonguing technique used is the standard slap which Weiss &
Netti describe as having 'a clear pitch and the typical noise component of the slap-tongue. It
225
is produced with the normal embouchure, can be performed as a very short sound or as the
attack of a sustained tone' (Weiss & Netti, 2010 pp.142-143). It is the latter of these two
productions, which has a sustained tone, that is required for Evanoff's piece and the slap
should be viewed as one of a number of articulation techniques used.
Fig.4.7.11 Ray Evanoff Diagramming a Vivisection of Yours and Mine (Ineffectual Tracings of Antiquated Sounds):
A Floregium (2010) mvmt 2 page 5 line 1
226
Conclusion
Implications for Performance
When realising an extended technique, performers must choose an appropriate method of
sound production based upon their understanding of the technique's significance within the
work. These choices are based upon an analysis of the piece and an identification of the
important relationships within the composition, which can be emphasised through the
manipulation of the various extended techniques. In the introduction to this thesis the
following quote from Lester (1995) was discussed in relation to performance:
each nuance limits the piece by excluding other options for that element. In
this sense, a performance is necessarily only a single option for that piece,
delineating some aspects while excluding others
(Lester, 1995, p.199)
Due to the nature of music performance, which only allows an audience to experience the
art form in a single temporal space, a performer can only present one interpretative choice
for a composition at any one time. This means that the choice of emphasis for each
compositional 'element' when approaching extended techniques takes on a significance
when portraying the important relationships to an audience.
Each composition has identifiable relationships between the use of extended and standard
playing techniques, and these relationships can manifest themselves in a number of ways:
pitch relationships within microtones; pitch relationships within multiphonics; beating
patterns within multiphonics; beating patterns within singing and playing passages; rhythm
and pitch elements whilst using slap tongue; and so on. These compositional elements are
often related to, and perhaps even the reason for, the extended techniques the composer
has chosen for that particular passage. In identifying the technique's role within the
composition, the performer can then consider the nuances within the technique that can be
expressed with the intention of emphasising the relationships that have been identified.
With this approach the performer can decide on the aspects of the work they deem
227
important and present them for performance. Although, due to the nature of live
performance, the resulting sound may change through inaccuracy or accident, the
performer's decision-making process about the piece has been completed and the
performer's individual interpretation can be moulded in this way.
In order to successfully achieve the level of nuanced performance required when
interpreting extended techniques, it is my argument that the performer needs to
understand the acoustical behaviour of their instrument, and the sounds that it can
produce. It is through an understanding of the saxophone's harmonic series, mechanical
system, bore shape, and the importance of mouthpiece and reed system, as well as such
acoustical phenomena as fork fingering, heterodyne components, and the tongue's role in
creating Bernouilli's effect, that the performer can master the physiological challenges
necessary to create the desired sounds. The performer can view each physical manipulation
as a separate gesture within the linear progression of the piece. This approach to
interpretation allows for the amount of muscle memory (the 'recall' that Rob Buckland refers
to) needed to achieve the desired manipulation to be learned in a linear fashion, treating
the techniques as 'events' which occur in a linear time frame, and thus manipulating a
'temporal realisation' within the linear field as explained by Clarke (1995, p.51). By
approaching a work in this way a performer can achieve the amount of recall needed to
perform the intricate level of detail associated with this style of performance.
New Compositions for the Saxophone

Sections 5, 6 and 7 of chapter 4 of this thesis describe this method of playing in relation to
three compositions that were written for the author in close collaboration with the composer.
These compositions offer the performer the opportunity to consider not only fingering
patterns and exercises, but also the oral cavity manipulations needed to make some of the
techniques work. This is especially true of Scott Mc Laughlin's Neither Wholes nor Parts
228
(2010) which is made up entirely of multiphonics which are manipulated in this way. There
are works appearing in the saxophone's repertoire which require mastery of the 'internal
elements' of tongue position and oral cavity manipulation. Established works of this type
include Asphyxia (2000) by Aaron Cassidy, Graffiti (1993) by Roger Redgate and Largo
calligrafico / "patientiam" (2012) by Evan Johnson, all of which require specific tongue and
oral cavity manipulations to execute their extremely fast rhythms. Chris Redgate's article
Re-inventing the Oboe (2007) outlines his personal approach to realising the scores of both
Roger Redgate and Michael Finnissy by describing which tongue positions will allow him to
execute the music, indicating that woodwind technique is advancing to meet the demands of
the score. However, performers often find themselves wanting for teaching and learning
materials which adequately explain how this way of playing can be achieved. As extended
techniques are delicately integrated into these scores the manipulation of them becomes
part of the overall instrumental technique needed to execute the music, again presenting an
instrumental technique which is concerned with both internal and external 'elements'.
Implications for Saxophone Pedagogy

The performer needs to achieve a great deal of dexterity within the oral cavity whilst
manipulating extended techniques in this way. This is an aspect of saxophone technique
that is overlooked in the standard methods and tutor books as discussed in chapter 1, which
rely heavily on external elements such as fingering charts and exercises, rather than
internal elements such as tongue position and oral cavity shape. The first exercise in Trevor
Wye's flute method Practice Book for the Flute. Book I: Tone (1999, p.4) has the student
manipulating the harmonic series in the same way that the saxophonist is asked to in
Rousseau's and Rascher's books as described in chapter 1, figure 1.8. The emphasis of the
harmonic series as an element of basic technique seems appropriate for flute playing,
however I would argue that it is just as important to basic saxophone technique as the tone
can be much improved by adopting register-specific tongue positions (rather than air stream
229
direction in the case of the flute). Bartolozzi reminds us that the woodwind instruments are
'the only ones which use a 'mixed' system of sound production (i.e. fundamental tones for
the lower register and various natural harmonics for the upper registers)' (Bartolozzi, 1982
p.12). This observation highlights the importance of the harmonic series to all woodwind
instruments and therefore the necessity to understand the manipulation of it. The recent
tutor book Playing the Saxophone (2012) released by Rob Buckland begins to indicate the
importance of vowel shapes on tone through the inclusion of his 'Vowel Superimposition
Exercise' where the student is encouraged to form different vowel shapes when playing in
the different registers of the saxophone. There are three vowels mentioned covering three
registers: 'AAH' covering the notes from Bb3 to C#5, 'OOH' covering D5 to A5 and 'EEE' for
notes higher than A5. This roughly corresponds with the mechanical working of the
saxophone: 'AHH' being the fundamentals, 'OOH' being the notes played with the first
octave pip and 'EEE' being those notes played with the second octave pip. This method
introduces the idea of how vowels can aid tone production as the saxophonist is tuning their
vocal tract and focussing the air in the correct way. The method does not mention which
saxophone this exercise should be played on, and the idea that these vowel shapes will
work on all of the saxophones is contradictory to Buckland's own assertion that tongue
placement is specific to pitch (a G6 on the alto is the same tongue position as a C6 on the
soprano) as quoted in chapter 3 of this thesis. In order to manipulate the saxophone with
any level of detail, much more nuanced vowel shapes and tongue placements need to be
considered in future exercises for students.
Teaching is often hindered in this respect by the lack of this awareness reflected in the
syllabus of the music examination bodies, rendering the need to teach this level of detail
unnecessary. I have already mentioned in chapter 1 that the examination bodies do not
require two octave scales on the note F#, as not every saxophone has the necessary F#6
key. This key is not the only way to play F#6, however, and to learn the forked (or 'front')
F#6 fingering the pupil would need to learn a specific tongue position very similar to playing
230
in the altissimo range to sound the note. The presence of this note would encourage the use
of the oral cavity shape and thus promote good technique as outlined in Rob Buckland's
method through the use of vowel sounds. Repertoire pieces which use harmonics, such as
the second movement of Phil Woods' sonata (1997), could also be considered to introduce
young learners to these techniques and to prepare them for pieces which use extended
techniques when they appear in the syllabus for the diploma examinations.
Developing a New Instrumental Technique – Understanding Internal

Elements
The research that has been done into tongue position and oral cavity manipulation by
acousticians such as Chen, Wolf et al has been successful in collecting data pertaining to the
tongue and larynx placement for both the basic and extended ranges of the saxophone.
These studies have not, however, considered how the tongue affects the tone of the
instrument during normal playing (perhaps due to the subjective nature of tone production
and preference), or how the tongue is able to sound individual partials in a multiphonic
through the specific adjustment of it within the oral cavity. Much work has been done
collecting data from videofluerography and laryngoscopy regarding the altissimo register,
but no data has been collected in regards to multiphonics. In my opinion this opportunity to
understand the full significance of Bernouilli's principle has been missed, and more data
needs to be collected to explain exactly what happens when sounding multiphonics in order
to help the performer achieve the sound which is desired.
To disseminate this data, I do not believe a textbook-approach would be sufficient as that
would demonstrate the same problems of concentrating on the tables and charts associated
with 'external elements' as described above in relation to Buckland's method. An interactive
tool would be more appropriate to show the performer how the air stream changes as it is
compressed by the tongue, and which vowel sounds will help the performer achieve this.
Ellen Fallowfield's recent website www.cellomap.com goes some way to helping performers
understand the extended techniques possible on the cello through use of tutorial videos and
231
diagrams. Similarly, www.clarinet-multiphonics.org uses flash animations to indicate what
happens within the tube of the clarinet as dictated by the fingerings to create multiphonics
(a mixture of both internal and external elements, although this website makes no mention
of how the player places the tongue). I believe a mixture of these two devices of tutorial
videos and flash animations would create a valuable resource for saxophonists trying to
achieve extended techniques on their instrument by demonstrating both the internal and
external elements through interactive animations and tools.
232
Appendices
Appendix 1
Track list for the accompanying CD of audio examples.
Equipment used:
Soprano saxophone – Selmer Mark VII prototype. Selmer C** mouthpiece.
Alto saxophone – Selmer balanced action. Vandoren AL3 mouthpiece and Freddie Gregory
F6 mouthpiece.
Tenor saxophone – Yamaha YTS27. Selmer D mouthpiece and Berg Larson 110 mouthpiece.
Flute – Emerson
Clarinet – Buffet R13, Yamaha YCL5 mouthpiece.
All tracks were recorded using a stereo pair of DPA 4006 Omni microphones, with the
exception of track 30 which was recorded on a Shure SM57.
Track Description Chapter Page Instrument

Number
1 Kientzy multiphonic number 1 for alto Introduction 24 Alto
as taken from Les Sons Multiples Aux
saxophone
Saxophones (2003)
2 Fig.2 Kientzy multiphonic number 115 Introduction 26 Alto
for alto as taken from Les Sons
saxophone
Multiples Aux Saxophones (2003)
3 Arno Bornkamp - Denisov Sonata Introduction 27 -
Mvmt II b.1
4 John Harle - Denisov Sonata Introduction 28 -
Mvmt II b.1
5 Claude Delangle - Denisov Sonata Introduction 28 -
Mvmt II b.1
6 Fig.4 Takashi Yoshimatsu Fuzzy Bird 1 37 Alto
Sonata (1995) p.1 line 4
saxophone
7 Fig.5 Nicolaus A. Huber Aus Schmerz 1 37 Alto
und Trauer (1982) p.11 b.5
saxophone
8 Fig.6 Fuminori Tanada Mysterious 1 37 Soprano
Morning III (1996) p.7 line 7
saxophone
9 Fig.7 Mike Vaughan Ensphered (1990) 1 38 Soprano
bb.9-10
saxophone
10 Fig.9 Yoshihisa Taïra Pénombres VI 1 39 Alto
(1996) p.1 line 1
saxophone
saxophone
233
saxophone
13 Fig.16 Betsy Jolas Épisode Quatrième 1 42 Tenor
(1983) p.4 line 5
saxophone
14 Yoshihisa Taïra Pénombres VI (1996) 1 43 Alto
p.8 line 3
saxophone
15 Type Ba multiphonic 1 45 Alto
saxophone
16 Type CE multiphonic 1 45 Alto
saxophone
17 Type Ce multiphonic 1 45 Alto
saxophone
18 Type Cb multiphonic 1 45 Alto
saxophone
19 Type C multiphonic 1 46 Alto
saxophone
20 TypeD/B multiphonic 1 46 Alto
saxophone
21 Type Da multiphonic 1 46 Alto
saxophone
22 Type E multiphonic 1 46 Alto
saxophone
23 Type Eb multiphonic 1 46 Alto
saxophone
24 Fuminori Tanada Mysterious Morning III 1 48 Soprano
(1996) p.6 line 5
saxophone
25 Luciano Berio Sequenza VIIb (2003) 1 48 Soprano
line 13 taken from Delangle (1993)
saxophone
26 Harmonique taken from Coltrane jazz 1 49 -
(1961) by John Coltrane
27 Pedro Itturalde Pequena Czarda (1997) 1 54 Alto
p.3 lines 7 and 8
saxophone
28 Secco slap, normal slap and 1 59 Alto
embouchure slap as identified by Weiss
saxophone
& Netti (2010)
29 Fundamental and three partials on the 2 65 Flute
flute (tube entirely closed)
30 Fundamental and three partials on the 2 68 Clarinet
clarinet (tube entirely closed)
31 Fundamental and three partials on the 2 70 Soprano
234
soprano saxophone (tube entirely saxophone
closed)
32 A = 440 on vandoren AL3 mouthpiece 2 77 Alto
saxophone
33 A = 440 Freddie Gregory F6 2 77 Alto
mouthpiece
saxophone
34 A = 440 on Selmer D mouthpiece 2 78 Tenor
saxophone
35 A = 440 Berg Larson 110 mouthpiece 2 78 Tenor
saxophone
36 Kientzy multiphonic number 55 2 82 Soprano
saxophone
saxophone
38 G – G quartertone sharp-G# using the 2 91 Alto
mechanical alteration
saxophone
39 Denisov's Sonata for Alto Saxophone 2 92 Alto
and Piano (1973), movement II, line
saxophone
using the 'lâcher les lévres' technique
40 Denisov's Sonata for Alto Saxophone 2 92 Alto
and Piano (1973), movement II, line
saxophone
using the mechanical alteration
technique
41 The four multiphonics used in Scavone 2 96 Alto
et al's experiment to measure sound
saxophone
pressure levels recorded on the
Vandoren AL3 mouthpiece
42 The four multiphonics used in Scavone 2 96 Alto
et al's experiment to measure sound
saxophone
pressure levels recorded on the Freddie
Gregory F6 mouthpiece
43 The resulting sounds from the diagram 2 110 Alto
of the harmonic series played on the
saxophone
soprano saxophone and the
corresponding tongue positions
44 Yoshimatsu Fuzzy Bird Sonata (1991) 3 115 -
figure B (Nobuya Sugawa)
figure B (Rob Buckland)
figure B (Sarah Markham)
figure J (Nobuya Sugawa)
figure J (Rob Buckland)
235
figure J (Sarah Markham)
50 Kientzy multiphonic number 36 upper 3 117 Alto
partials suppressed
saxophone
51 Kientzy multiphonic number 13 upper 3 117 Alto
partials suppressed
saxophone
52 Luciano Berio Sequenza Ixb (1980) 3 118 -
figure J (Claude Delangle)
53 Luciano Berio Sequenza Ixb (1980) 3 118 -
figure J (Wallace Halliday)
54 Kientzy multiphonic number 20 3 118 Alto
saxophone
55 Luciano Berio Sequenza VIIb (2003) 3 119 -
line 13 (Claude Delangle)
56 Luciano Berio Sequenza VIIb (2003) 3 119 -
line 13 (Wallace Halliday)
57 Betsy Jolas Épisode Quatrième (1983) 3 120 -
page 4 line 5 (Claude Delangle)
58 Betsy Jolas Épisode Quatrième (1983) 3 121 -
page 4 line 5 (Daniel Kientzy)
(1996) page 6 lines 6 b.3
saxophone
60 Microtonal interval from Fuminori 4 138 Soprano
Tanada Mysterious Morning III (1996)
saxophone
page 1 line 1 - Tanada's fingerings
61 Microtonal interval from Fuminori 4 138 Soprano
Tanada Mysterious Morning III (1996)
saxophone
page 1 line 1 - Weiss & Netti's
fingerings
(1996) page 3 line 1 vocal part sharp
saxophone
Morning III (1996) page 3 line 1 –
saxophone
vocal part flat
(1996) page 8 line 2 – vocal part sharp
saxophone
(1996) page 8 line 2 – vocal part flat
saxophone
saxophone
67 Weiss & Netti multiphonic number 8 4 149 Soprano
saxophone
68 Kientzy multiphonic number 1 & 4 149 Soprano
236
Kientzy multiphonic number 85 saxophone
69 Nicolaus A. Huber Aus Schmerz und 4 155 Alto
Trauer (1982) page 7 line 1
saxophone
Trauer (1982) page 10 lines 1-2
saxophone
71 Fig.4 triad multipshonics in order of 4 158 Alto
appearance in Aus Schmerz und Trauer
saxophone
(1982)
Trauer (1982) page 5 line 3
saxophone
73 'Lip glissando' played on the Vandoren 4 163 Alto
AL3 mouthpiece
saxophone
74 'Lip glissando' played on the Freddie 4 163 Alto
Gregory F6 mouthpiece
saxophone
Trauer page 9 lines 6 and 7
saxophone
76 Betsy Jolas Épisode Quatrième (1983) 4 167 Tenor
page 3 line 6
saxophone
page 5 line 2
saxophone
page 5 line 2
saxophone
page 6 line 6
saxophone
page 6 line 5
saxophone
81 D#5 Bisbigliando 4 177 Tenor
saxophone
82 G5 Bisbigliando 4 178 Tenor
saxophone
page 3 line 2
saxophone
page 5 line 6
saxophone
page 5 line 4
saxophone
page 3 line 2
saxophone
87 Multiphonic used in Ichirô Nodaïra 4 186 Alto
237
Arabesque III (1983) bb.1-3 saxophone
88 Ichirô Nodaïra Arabesque III (1983) 4 188 Alto
bb.116 – 121 (Claude Delangle)
saxophone
89 Ichirô Nodaïra Arabesque III (1983) 4 189 -
b.120 (Claude Delangle)
90 E5 bisbigliando – Nodaira fingering 4 191 Alto
saxophone
91 E5 bisbigliando – Weiss & Netti 4 191 Alto
fingering
saxophone
92 E5 bisbigliando – Londeix fingering 4 191 Alto
saxophone
93 E5 bisbigliando – shared fingering 4 193 Alto
saxophone
b.153
saxophone
piano score b.82
saxophone
96 Scott Mc Laughlin Neither Wholes nor 4 205 Alto
Parts (2010) page 1 line 1
saxophone
saxophone
saxophone
99 Ben Isaacs I Never Look Like Myself 4 212 Soprano
(2009) movement I bb.2-3
saxophone
100 Ray Evanoff Diagramming a Vivisection 4 219 Soprano
of Yours and Mine (Ineffectual Tracings
saxophone
of Antiquated Sounds): A Floregium
(2010) mvmt 1 page 1 line 4
101 Examples of consecutive microtones 4 221 Soprano

with tempered notes taken from Ray
saxophone
Evanoff's Diagramming a Vivisection of
Yours and Mine (Ineffectual Tracings of
Antiquated Sounds): A Floregium
(2010)

saxophone

saxophone
238
Appendix 2
Diagram of the saxophone's mechanical system with names of keys as taken from Londeix's
Hello! Mr. Sax (1989)
239
Bibliography
Books and Theses
Artaud, P.-Y. (1995). The Multiphonic Flute. Paris: Gerard Billaudot.
Backus, J. (1978). 'Multiphonic Tones in the Woodwind Instruments'. Journal of the
Acoustical Society of America. 63 (2), pp.591-599.
Bartolozzi, B. (1982). New Sounds for Woodwind. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Benade, A. H. (1976). Fundamentals of Musical Acoustics. (2nd ed.). Mineola: Dover.
Benade, A. H. (1986). 'Interactions Between the Player's Windway and the Air Column of a
Musical Instrument'. Cleveland Clinic Quarterly. 53 (1), pp.27-32.
Benade, A. H., Lutgen, S. J., & Wolfe, J. (1988). 'The Saxophone Spectrum'. Journal of the
Acoustical Society of America. 83 (5), pp.1900-1907.
Boretz, B., & T. Cone, E. (1972). Perspectives on Contemporary Musical Theory. New York:
Norton.
Buckland, R (2012). Playing the Saxophone. Sanbach: Astute Music.
Caravan, R. L. (1974). Extensions of Technique for Clarinet and Saxophone. DMA thesis.
University of Rochester.
Carr, W.E. (1978). A Videofluorographic Investigation of Tongue and Throat Positions in
Playing Flute, Oboe, Clarinet, Bassoon and Saxophone. DMA thesis. University of
Southern California.
Chen, J. M., Smith, J., & Wolfe, J. (2008). 'Experienced Saxophonists Learn to Tune their
Vocal Tracts'. Science. 319 (5864), p.776.
Chen, J.-M., Smith, J., & Wolfe, J. (2010). 'How players use their Vocal Tracts in Advanced
Clarinet and Saxophone Performance'. Paper presented to the International Symposium
on Music Acoustics.
Chen, J.-M., Smith, J., & Wolfe, J. (2009). 'Saxophone acoustics: Introducing a Compendium
of Impedance and Sound Spectra'. Acoustics Australia. 37 (1), pp.18-23.
Chen, J. M., Smith, J., & Wolfe, J. (n.d.). Saxophones and the Vocal Tract: The Acoustics of
Saxophone Players [online] Available at:
http://www.phys.unsw.edu.au/jw/SaxTract.html. Accessed on 19th May 2009.
Cone, E. T. (1968). Musical Form and Musical Performance. New York: Norton.
Delangle, C., & Michat, J.-D. (1998) 'The Contemporary Saxophone'. In: Ingham, R. (ed)
The Cambridge Companion to the Saxophone. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Dick, R. (1987). Circular Breathing for the Flutist. St Louis: MMB Music.
Dick, R. (1989). The Other Flute. New York: Multiple breath music company.
Gross, J. (1998). Multiphonics for the Saxophone. Rottenburg: Advance music.
Howell, T. (1974). The Avant-Garde Flute. California: University of California Press.
240
Huber, N. A. (2012). 'Translation of Huber's Essay 'Konzeptionelle Rhythmuskomposition' on
Conceptional Rhythm Composition'. Contemporary Music Review. 27 (6) pp.569-577.
Husler, F., Rodd-Marling, Y. (1976). Singing: The Physical Nature of the Vocal Organ.
London: Hutchinson & Co.
Janette Taylor, R. (2005). Gerard Grisey's Anubis et Nout: A Historical and Analytical
Perspective. DMA thesis. University of Arizona.
Kahane, J. C., Beckford, N. S., Chorna, L. B., Teachey, J. C., & McClelland, D. K. (2006)
'Videofluoroscopic and Laryngoscopic Evaluation of the Upper Airway and Larynx of
Professional Bassoon Players'. Journal of Voice. 20 (2), pp.297-307.
Kientzy, D. (2003). Saxologie. Paris: Nova Musica.
Kientzy, D. (2003). Les Sons Multiples Aux Saxophones. Paris: Salabert.
Kynaston, T. (1978). Circular Breathing. Van Nuys: Alfred Publishing.
Kool, J. (1931). Das Saxophon. Translated by Lawrence S. Gwozdz. Baldock: Egon
Publishers.
Lester, J. (1995) 'Performance and Analysis: Interaction and Interpretation'. In: Rink, J.
(ed) The Practice of Performance. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. pp.197-216.
Lacy, S. (1994). Findings. Paris: Outre Mesure.
Londeix, J.-M. (1989). Hello! Mr. Sax. Paris: Alphonse Leduc.
Scavone, G.P. (1997). An Acoustical Analysis of Single-Reed Woodwind Instruments with an
Emphasis on Design and Performance Issues and Digital Waveguide Modelling
Techniques. DMA thesis. Stanford University.
Pierce, J.R. (1983). The Science of Musical Sound. New York: Scientific American Books.
Phelps, B.A. (1998). A Thesaurus of Saxophone Multiphonics and a Guide to their Practical
Application. DMA thesis. University of Washington.
Rascher, S. (n.d.). Top-Tones for the Saxophone. New York: Carl Fischer.
Redgate, C. (2007). 'Performing Sequenza VII'. Contemporary Music Review. 26 (2),
pp.219-230.
Rehfeldt, P. (1977). New Directions for Clarinet. California: University of California Press.
Rink, J. (1995). The Practice of Performance. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Rosen, J. (1984) 'Arabesque III; Pour Saxophone Alto Mi♭ et Piano by Ichirô Nodaïra'.
Notes. 41 (1), pp. 174-175.
Rousseau, E. (1978). Saxophone High Tones. Washington: MMB.
Scavone, G.P., Lefebvre, A., & Silva, A. R. da. (2008). 'Measurement of vocal-tract influence
during saxophone performance'. Journal of the Acoustical Society of America. 123 (4),
pp.2391-2400.
Scavone, G.P. (2003). 'Modelling Vocal-Tract Influence in Reed Wind Instruments'. Paper
Presented to the Stockholm Music Acoustics Conference. Stockholm: Sweden.
241
Thomas, P. (2007) 'Berio's Sequenza IV: Approaches to Performance and Interpretation'.
Contemporary Music Review. 26 (2) pp.189-205.
Veale, P., Mahnkopf, C.-S. (1994). The Techniques of Oboe Playing. Kassel: Bärenreiter.
Warnaby, J. (2003). 'The Music of Nicolaus A. Huber'. Tempo. 57(224), pp.22-38.
Weikert, M., Schlomicher-Their, J. (1999). 'Laryngeal Movements in Saxophone Playing:
Video-endoscopic Investigations With Saxophone Players'. Journal of Voice. 13(2), 265-
273.
Weiss, M., Netti, G. (2010). The Techniques of Saxophone Playing. Kassel: Bärenreiter.
Wolfe, J. (n.d.). Open vs Closed Pipes (Flutes vs clarinets). [online] Available at:
www.phys.unsw.edu.au/jw/flutes.v.clrinets.html. Accessed on 6th May 2009.
Wolfe, J. (n.d.). Saxophone Acoustics: An Introduction. [online] Available at:
www.phys.unsw.edu.au/%7Ejw/saxacoustics.html. Accessed on 6th May 2009.
Wolfe, J. (n.d.). Strings, Standing Waves and Harmonics. [online] Available at:
www.phys.unsw.edu.au/jw/strings.html. Accessed on 6th May 2009.
Wolfe, J. (n.d.). What is Acoustic Impedance and Why is it Important?. [online] Available at:
www.phys.unsw.edu.au/jw/z.html. Accessed on 6th May 2009.
Wye, T. (1999). Practice Book for the Flute. Book I: Tone. London: Novello.
Wyman, F. S. (1972). An Acoustical Study of Alto Saxophone Mouthpiece Chamber Design.
DMA thesis. University of Rochester: Eastman School of Music.
Repertoire
Berio, L. (1971). Sequenza VII. London: Universal Edition.
Berio, L. (1995). Sequenza VIIb. Wein: Universal Edition.
Berio, L. (1980). Sequenza IX. Milano: Universal Edition.
Berio, L. (1980). Sequenza IXb. Wein: Universal Edition.
Cassidy, A. (2000). Asphyxia. Buffalo: AMC.
Clarke, M. (1995). Enmeshed. Unpublished score.
Denisov, E. (1973). Sonata for Alto Saxophone and Piano. Paris: Leduc.
Evanoff, R (2010). Diagramming a Vivisection of Yours and Mine (Ineffectual Tracings of
Antiquated Sounds): A Floregium. Unpublished score.
Feld, J. (1993). Sonata for Alto Saxophone and Piano. Paris: Leduc.
Glazunov, A. (1936). Concerto. Paris: Leduc.
Huber, N.A. (1982). Aus Schmerz und Trauer. Germany: Breitkopf.
Ibert, J. (1935). Concertino da Camera. Paris: Leduc.
Isaacs, B. (2009). I Never Look Like Myself. Unpublished score.
Iturralde, P. (1997). Pequena Czarda. Madrid: Real Musical.
Johnson, E. (2012). Largo calligrafico / "patientiam". Unpublished score.
Jolas, B. (1984). Épisode Quatrième . Paris: Leduc.
242
Lauba, C. (1996). Neuf Etudes. Paris: Leduc.
Mc Laughlin, S (2010). Neither Wholes nor Parts. Unpublished score.
Mefano, P. (1996). Periple. Paris: Salabert.
Noda, R. (1975). Maï. Paris: Leduc.
Noda, R. (1973-1974). Improvisations I et II. Paris: Leduc.
Nodaira, I. (1983). Arabesque III. Paris: Lemoine.
Redgate, R. (1993). Graffiti. Paris: Lemoine.
Scelsi, G. (1986). Maknongan. Paris: Salabert.
Taïra, Y. (1996). Penombres VI. Paris: Eds. Transatlantiques.
Tanada, F. (1996). Mysterious Morning III. Paris: Lemoine.
Turnage, M.-A. (1994). Two Elegies Framing a Shout. London: Schott.
Vaughan, M. (1990). Ensphered. Unpublished score.
Walton, W. (1936). Façade. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Woods, P. (1997). Sonata. Mainz: Advance Music.
Yoshimatsu, T. (1995). Fuzzy Bird Sonata. Paris: Billaudot.
Discography
Berio, L. (1993) 'Sequenza IXb'.The Solitary Saxophone. Claude Delangle. France: Bis. BIS-
CD-640, Track 9.
Berio, L. (1993) 'Sequenza VIIb'. The Solitary Saxophone. Claude Delangle. France: Bis.
BIS-CD-640, Track 2.
Berio, L. (2006) 'Sequenza IXb'. Sequenzas I-XIV. Wallace Halliday. USA: Naxos. 8.557661-
63, CD2 Track 5.
Berio, L. (2006) 'Sequenza VIIb'. Sequenzas I-XIV. Wallace Halliday. USA: Naxos.
8.557661-63, CD2 Track 4.
Coltrane, J. (1961). 'Harmonique'. Coltrane Jazz. USA: Atlantic. SD 1354.
Jolas, B. (1984) 'Épisode Quatrième'. Instruments 3: Saxophone(s) Solo. Daniel Kientzy.
France: Poly-Arts Records. PAR 5303. Side B Track 3.
Jolas, B. (1994) 'Épisode Quatrième'. The Solitary Saxophone. Claude Delangle. Germany:
Bis. BIS CD-640. Track 5.
Kientzy, Daniel (1990) L'Art du Saxophon. Paris: Nova-Musica. NMCD 5101
Nodaïra, I. (1998) 'Arabesque III'. The Japanese Saxophone. Claude Delangle. Germany:
Bis. BIS CD-890.
Tanada, F. (1998) 'Mysterious Morning III'. The Japanese Saxophone. Claude Delangle.
Germany: Bis. BIS CD-890.
Yoshimatsu, T (1991) Movement I: Run, Bird from 'Fuzzy Bird Sonata'. Fuzzy Bird. Nobuya
Sugawa. APCE 5199. Track 1.
243
Yoshimatsu, T (2011) Movement I: Run, Bird from 'Fuzzy Bird Sonata'. Run, Sing, Fly. Sarah
Markham. Uk: Saxophone Classics. CC4005. Track 6.
Yoshimatsu, T (2005) Movement I: Run, Bird from 'Fuzzy Bird Sonata'. Towards the Light.
Rob Buckland. Uk: Quartz. Track 2.
244

I Harrison Final Thesis

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

I Harrison Final Thesis

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

University of Huddersfield Repository

A thesis submitted to the University of Huddersfield in partial fulfilment of the requirements

The University of Huddersfield

Fig.1.1 Jaques Ibert Concertino da Camera Movement II bb.24-30

Fig.1.2 Alexander Glavunov Concerto for alto saxophone figure 55 bb.4-7

Fig.1.4 Takashi Yoshimatsu Fuzzy Bird Sonata (1995) p.1 line 4

Fig.1.6 Fuminori Tanada Mysterious Morning III (1996) p.7 line 7

Fig.1.7 Mike Vaughan Ensphered (1990) bb.9-10

Fig.1.8 Demonstration of playing on different partials (represented numerically) from Sigurd

Fig.1.9 Yoshihisa Taïra Pénombres VI (1996) p.1 line 1

Fig.1.12 Ichiro Nodaira Arabesque III (1983) b.130

Fig.1.13 Fuminori Tanada Mysterious Morning III (1996) p.2 line 6

Fig.1.14 Fuminori Tanada Mysterious Morning III (1996) p.1 line 1

Fig.1.15 Fuminori Tanada Mysterious Morning III (1996) p.10 line 4

Fig.1.16 Betsy Jolas Épisode Quatrième (1983) p.4 line 5

Fig.1.17 Yoshihisa Taïra Pénombres VI (1996) p.8 line 3

Fig.1.19 Ryo Noda Maï (1975) p.4 lines 3-5

Fig.1.21 Fuminori Tanada Mysterious morning III (1996) p.6 line 5

Fig.1.22 Luciano Berio Sequenza VIIb (2003) line 13

Fig.1.23 Christian Lauba Savane (1996) p.7 line 2

Fig.1.26 Luciano Berio Sequenza IXb (1980) p.5 line 7

Fig.1.27 Luciano Berio Sequenza VIIb (2003) line 13

Fig.1.29 Fuminori Tanada Mysterious morning III (1996) p.7 line 5

Fig.1.30 Pedro Itturalde Pequena Czarda (1997)

Fig.1.32 Michael Clark Enmeshed (2005)

Fig.1.34Fuminori Tanada Mysterious morning III (1996) p.3 line 1

Fig.1.35(a) Aaron Cassidy Asphyxia (2000) b.26

Fig.1.35(b)Aaron Cassidy Asphyxia (2000) bb.30-31

Fig.1.36 Christian Lauba Jungle (1996) p.14 line 8

Fig.1.37 Betsy Jolas Épisode Quatrième (1983) b.1

Fig.1.39 Christian Lauba Balafon (1996) p.1 line 8

Fig.2.5 Wavelengths within a cylinder closed at one end

Fig.2.7 Diagram of different conic sections available at

Fig.2.10 Acoustic impedance as measured in a cylinder plus cone, a soprano saxophone, a

Fig.2.13 Diagram representing the flow of pressure across a reed.

Fig.2.16 Heterodyne components in clarinet multiphonics taken from Backus (1978)

Fig.2.18 SPEAR analysis of Kientzy multiphonic number 48 played on the soprano

Fig.2.22(b) G# bridge mechanism, G# key depressed, right hand not depressed

Fig.2.22(c) G# bridge mechanism, G# key depressed, right hand depressed

Fig.2.22(d) altered G# bridge mechanism, G# key depressed, right hand depressed

Fig.2.23 Fingering chart taken from Caravan (1974)

Fig.2.24 Fingering chart taken from http://www.wfg.woodwind.org

Fig.2.35 Endoscope of a bassoonist producing vibrato

Fig.2.36 Endoscope plus illustration of a saxophone player's larynx during inspiration

Fig.2.39 Diagram of tongue positions when pronouncing different vowel shapes

Fig.3.1 Yoshimatsu Fuzzy Bird Sonata (1991) Mvmt 1 figure B

Fig.3.2 Yoshimatsu Fuzzy Bird Sonata (1991) Mvmt 1 figure J

Fig.3.3 Luciano Berio Sequenza IXb (1980) figure J

Fig.3.6 Luciano Berio Sequenza VIIb (2003) line 13

Fig.3.7 Betsy Jolas Épisode Quatrième (1983) page 4 line 5

Fuminori Tanada Mysterious Morning III (1996)

Fig.4.1.2 Fuminori Tanada Mysterious Morning III (1996) page 7 line 7

Fig.4.1.3 Fuminori Tanada Mysterious Morning III (1996) page 6 line 5

Fig.4.1.4 Fuminori Tanada Mysterious Morning III (1996) page 1 line 1

Fig.4.1.6 Fuminori Tanada Mysterious Morning III (1996) page 1 line 5

Fig.4.1.8 Fuminori Tanada Mysterious Morning III (1996) page 3 line 4

Fig.4.1.9 Fuminori Tanada Mysterious Morning III (1996) page 7 line 5

Fig.4.1.10 Fuminori Tanada Mysterious Morning III (1996) page 3 line 1

Fig.4.1.13 Fuminori Tanada Mysterious Morning III (1996) page 8 line 2

Fig.4.1.19 Fuminori Tanada Mysterious Morning III (1996) page 1 line 2

Fig.4.1.20 Fuminori Tanada Mysterious Morning III (1996) page 3 line 5

Fig.4.1.21 Fuminori Tanada Mysterious Morning III (1996) page 7 line 5

Fig.4.1.22 Fuminori Tanada Mysterious Morning III (1996) page 6 line 6